Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 410
1 of 410

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual PDF

S-Class Coupe Operator's Manual

Order no. 6515 4538 13 Part no. 217 584 34 01 Edition A 2016

21758434017 2175843401

S-C las

sC ou pe

Op era

tor 's Ma

nu al

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstrae 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod and iTunes are registered trade- marks of Apple Inc. RBurmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft and Windows media are reg- istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- tion. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey and related brands are reg- istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes- sion indicate an instruction with sev- eral steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Dis play

This text indicates a message in the multifunction/COMAND/Audio dis- play.

As at 23.09.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc- tions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App:

Apple iOS

Android

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2175843401 21758434017

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 22

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 43

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 105

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 123

Climate control ................................. 135

Driving and parking .......................... 149

On-board computer and displays .... 229

Stowage and features ...................... 299

Maintenance and care ...................... 323

Breakdown assistance ..................... 341

Wheels and tires ............................... 361

Technical data ................................... 397

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 199 12 V socket

see Sockets 360 camera

Cleaning ......................................... 336 Function/notes ............................. 211

A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 252 Function/notes ................................ 68 Important safety notes .................... 68 Warning lamp ................................. 288

Accident Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 62

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 138 Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus

With spotlight function ................... 221 Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 246 Display message ............................ 274 Function/information .................... 222

Active Body Control (ABC) Display message ............................ 273 Function/notes ............................. 194

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 246 Display message ............................ 274 Function/information .................... 225

Active multicontour seat .................. 111 Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 203 Display message ............................ 275 Exiting a parking space .................. 205 Function/notes ............................. 202 Important safety notes .................. 202

Parking .......................................... 204 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 75 Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 72 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 198 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Display message ............................ 268 Function/notes ............................. 127 Switching on/off ........................... 128

Additional speedometer ................... 248 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 403 Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 59 Display message ............................ 264 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 52 Important safety notes .................... 50 Introduction ..................................... 50 Knee bag .......................................... 52 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 53 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 45 Side impact air bag .......................... 52 Window curtain air bag .................... 53

Air vents Glove box ....................................... 147 Important safety notes .................. 146 Rear ............................................... 147 Setting ........................................... 146 Setting the center air vents ........... 146 Setting the side air vents ............... 147

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 272 Function/notes ............................. 197

Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 78 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 78

Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

4 Index

Armrest Stowage compartment .................. 302

Ashtray ............................................... 306 Assistance display (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 243 Assistance menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 244 ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 330 Hiding a service message .............. 330 Resetting the service interval dis- play ................................................ 330 Service message ............................ 330 Special service requirements ......... 331

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 78 Function ........................................... 78 Switching off the alarm .................... 78

ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 246 Display message ............................ 272 Function/notes ............................. 215

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights Display message ............................ 267 see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 331 Automatic engine start (ECOstart/ stop function) .................................... 156 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 156 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 124 Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 162 Automatic drive program ............... 164 Changing gear ............................... 162 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 159 Display message ............................ 281 Driving tips .................................... 162 Emergency running mode .............. 167 Engaging drive position .................. 161 Engaging neutral ............................ 160 Engaging park position automati- cally ............................................... 159

Engaging reverse gear ................... 160 Engaging the park position ............ 159 Kickdown ....................................... 162 Manual drive program .................... 164 Manual drive program (Mercedes- AMG vehicles) ................................ 165 Oil temperature (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 249 Overview ........................................ 159 Problem (malfunction) ................... 167 Program selector button ................ 163 Pulling away ................................... 154 Starting the engine ........................ 153 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 163 Transmission position display ........ 161 Transmission positions .................. 162

Automatic transmission emer- gency mode ....................................... 167

B BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 69 Important safety notes .................... 69

Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 86 Important safety notes .................... 85 Replacing ......................................... 86

Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 349 Display message ............................ 269 Important safety notes .................. 347 Jump starting ................................. 351

Belt see Seat belts

Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Display message ............................ 258 Notes ............................................. 403

Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Index 5

Brake lamps Display message ............................ 266

Brakes ABS .................................................. 68 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72 BAS .................................................. 68 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 69 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 403 Display message ............................ 252 EBD .................................................. 75 High-performance brake system .... 178 Hill start assist ............................... 155 HOLD function ............................... 192 Important safety notes .................. 176 Maintenance .................................. 176 Parking brake ................................ 172 Riding tips ...................................... 176 Warning lamp ................................. 287

Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 342 see Flat tire see Towing away

Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 35 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 231

C California

Important notice for retail cus- tomers and lessees .......................... 24

Calling up a malfunction see Display messages

Camera see 360 camera see Rear view camera

Car see Vehicle

Car key see SmartKey

Care 360 camera ................................. 336 Car wash ........................................ 331 Carpets .......................................... 339 Display ........................................... 337 Exhaust pipe .................................. 337 Exterior lights ................................ 335

Gear or selector lever .................... 338 Interior ........................................... 337 Matte finish ................................... 334 Night View Assist Plus ................... 337 Notes ............................................. 331 Paint .............................................. 333 Plastic trim .................................... 338 Power washer ................................ 333 Rear view camera .......................... 336 Roof lining ...................................... 339 Seat belt ........................................ 339 Seat cover ..................................... 338 Sensors ......................................... 335 Steering wheel ............................... 338 Trim pieces .................................... 338 Washing by hand ........................... 333 Wheels ........................................... 334 Windows ........................................ 335 Wiper blades .................................. 335 Wooden trim .................................. 338

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 240 Center console

Overview .......................................... 37 Stowage space .............................. 301

Center console in the rear com- partment

Stowage compartment .................. 302 Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 83 Changing the media source ............. 240 Child

Restraint system .............................. 64 Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 67 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 65 On the front-passenger seat ............ 66 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 66 Top Tether ....................................... 65

Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 63

Cigarette lighter ................................ 306 Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 335 Climate control

Automatic climate control ............. 137 Controlling automatically ............... 139 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 138

6 Index

Defrosting the windows ................. 141 Defrosting the windshield .............. 141 ECO start/stop function ................ 137 General notes ................................ 136 Indicator lamp ................................ 139 Ionization ....................................... 146 Notes on using the automatic cli- mate control .................................. 137 Overview of systems ...................... 136 Perfume atomizer .......................... 144 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 143 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 139 Refrigerant ..................................... 405 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 406 Setting the air distribution ............. 140 Setting the air vents ...................... 146 Setting the airflow ......................... 141 Setting the climate mode ............... 140 Setting the temperature ................ 140 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 143 Switching on/off ........................... 138 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 143 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 142 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 141

Climate control system Climate control .............................. 138

Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 245 Display message ............................ 259 Operation/notes .............................. 70

COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 337

Combination switch .......................... 126 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 236 Convenience closing feature .............. 99 Convenience opening feature ............ 99 Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 328 Display message ............................ 268

Filling capacity ............................... 405 Important safety notes .................. 404 Temperature gauge ........................ 231 Warning lamp ................................. 294

Coolbox .............................................. 308 Cooling

see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 29 Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 265 Function/notes ............................. 127

Crash-responsive emergency light- ing ....................................................... 130 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 194 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with- out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 74 Cruise control

Calling up the speed last stored .... 180 Cruise control lever ....................... 180 Deactivating ................................... 181 Display message ............................ 278 Driving system ............................... 179 Function/notes ............................. 179 General notes ................................ 179 Important safety notes .................. 179 Setting a speed .............................. 181 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 180

Cup holder Center console .............................. 304 Important safety notes .................. 304 Rear compartment ......................... 305

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 27 Customer Relations Department ....... 27

D Data

see Technical data Data carrier

Selecting ........................................ 240 Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 267 Function/notes ............................. 124 Switching on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 248

Index 7

Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Diagnostics connection ...................... 26 Digital speedometer ......................... 237 DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 159 Display

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 330 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 251 Driving systems ............................. 272 Engine ............................................ 268 General notes ................................ 251 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 251 Introduction ................................... 251 Lights ............................................. 265 Safety systems .............................. 252 SmartKey ....................................... 283 Tires ............................................... 279 Vehicle ........................................... 281

Distance recorder see Odometer see Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 296 Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 71 DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 184 Activation conditions ..................... 184 Cruise control lever ....................... 183 Deactivating ................................... 188 Display message ............................ 276 Displays in the instrument cluster .. 187 Driving tips .................................... 189 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 185 Function/notes ............................. 182 Important safety notes .................. 182 Setting a speed .............................. 186 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 187 Stopping ........................................ 186 with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............................................... 190

Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 90 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 83

Control panel ................................... 40 Display message ............................ 282 Emergency locking ........................... 91 Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 Important safety notes .................... 89 Opening (from inside) ...................... 89 Power closing .................................. 90

Drinking and driving ......................... 174 Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 164 Manual ........................................... 164 Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) ............................................... 165 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 250

Driver's door see Doors

Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 331

Driving Assistance package ............. 222 Driving on flooded roads .................. 178 Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 75 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 69 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 70 Distance warning function ............... 71 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) ............................................. 75 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 73 Important safety information ........... 67 Overview .......................................... 67 PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 75 STEER CONTROL ............................. 77

Driving systems 360camera .................................. 211 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 222 Active Body Control ABC ............... 194 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 225 Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 AIRMATIC ...................................... 197 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 215 Cruise control ................................ 179

8 Index

Display message ............................ 272 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 190 Driving Assistance package ........... 222 HOLD function ............................... 192 Night View Assist Plus ................... 219 PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 Rear view camera .......................... 207 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 217

Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 178 Automatic transmission ................. 162 Brakes ........................................... 176 Break-in period .............................. 150 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 189 Downhill gradient ........................... 176 Drinking and driving ....................... 174 Driving in winter ............................. 178 Driving on flooded roads ................ 178 Driving on wet roads ...................... 178 Exhaust check ............................... 174 Fuel ................................................ 174 General .......................................... 174 Hydroplaning ................................. 178 Icy road surfaces ........................... 178 Limited braking efficiency on sal- ted roads ....................................... 176 Snow chains .................................. 365 Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 176 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 150 Wet road surface ........................... 176

DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 241

E EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 116 EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 117 Function/notes ............................. 116

EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)

Display message ............................ 255 Function/notes ................................ 75

ECO display Function/notes ............................. 175

On-board computer ....................... 236 ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start .................. 156 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 156 Deactivating/activating ................. 157 General information ....................... 155 Important safety notes .................. 155 Introduction ................................... 155

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 62

Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 90 Trunk ............................................... 97 Vehicle ............................................. 90

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 59

Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 23

Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 293 Display message ............................ 268 ECO start/stop function ................ 155 Engine number ............................... 400 Irregular running ............................ 158 Jump-starting ................................. 351 Starting (important safety notes) ... 153 Starting problems .......................... 158 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 153 Starting via smartphone ................ 154 Starting with the Start/Stop but- ton ................................................. 154 Switching off .................................. 171 Switching off with the Start/Stop button ............................................ 171 Switching off with the vehicle key .. 171 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 356

Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 398 Problem (malfunction) ................... 158

Engine emergency stop .................... 359 Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 327 Additives ........................................ 403 Checking the oil level ..................... 325

Index 9

Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 325 Checking the oil level using the on-board computer ........................ 327 Display message ............................ 270 Filling capacity ............................... 403 Notes about oil grades ................... 403 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 325 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 249 Viscosity ........................................ 403

ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 250 Characteristics ................................. 73 Deactivating/activating ................... 74 Display message ............................ 252 Function/notes ................................ 73 General notes .................................. 73 Important safety information ........... 73 Warning lamp ................................. 290

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ...................................................... 73 Exhaust

see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... 174 Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 337 Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 335 see Lights

Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 118 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 118 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 118 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 119 Setting ........................................... 118 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 121 Storing the parking position .......... 119

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 301

F Features ............................................. 304 Filler cap

see Refueling

Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 400 Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 383 MOExtended tires .......................... 343 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 342 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 344

Floormats ........................................... 320 Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 398 Two-way radio ................................ 398

Front-passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat ..... 108

Fuel Additives ........................................ 402 Consumption statistics .................. 236 Displaying the current consump- tion ................................................ 235 Displaying the range ...................... 235 Driving tips .................................... 174 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 401 Important safety notes .................. 401 Notes for MercedesAMG vehi- cles ................................................ 402 Problem (malfunction) ................... 170 Refueling ........................................ 167 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 401

Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 235

Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 401 Problem (malfunction) ................... 170

Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 358 Before changing ............................. 357 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 357 Engine emergency stop ................. 359 Fuse box in the engine compart- ment .............................................. 358 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 357 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 358 Important safety notes .................. 356

10 Index

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 320 General notes ................................ 317 Important safety notes .................. 317 Opening/closing the garage door .. 320 Programming (button in the rear- view mirror) ................................... 318 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 318

Gasoline ............................................. 401 Gear indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 249 Genuine parts ...................................... 22 Glove box ........................................... 301

H Handbrake

see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 94 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 126 Head bags

Display message ............................ 262 Head restraints

Adjusting ....................................... 109 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 109 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 110

Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 247 Displays and operating .................. 233 Function/notes ............................. 233 Important safety notes .................. 233 Selecting displays .......................... 246 Setting the position ....................... 247 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 121

Headlamps Fogging up ..................................... 129 see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 126 High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 127 Display message ............................ 266 Switching on/off ........................... 126

Hill start assist .................................. 155

HOLD function Activating ....................................... 193 Activation conditions ..................... 193 Deactivating ................................... 193 Display message ............................ 276 Function/notes ............................. 192 General notes ................................ 192

Hood Closing ........................................... 325 Display message ............................ 282 Important safety notes .................. 324 Opening ......................................... 324

Horn ...................................................... 32 HUD

see Head-up display Hydroplaning ..................................... 178

I Ignition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 78 Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 296

Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators see Turn signals

Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 33 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230 Interior lighting

Control ........................................... 129 Emergency lighting ........................ 130 Overview ........................................ 129 Reading lamp ................................. 129

J Jack

Using ............................................. 385 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 351

K Key positions

SmartKey ....................................... 151

Index 11

Start/Stop button .......................... 151 KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Deactivation ..................................... 83 General notes .................................. 83 Locking ............................................ 83 Start function ................................... 84 Unlocking ......................................... 83

Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 162

Knee bag .............................................. 52

L Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 65 License plate lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 266 Light function, active

Display message ............................ 267 Light sensor (display message) ....... 267 Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 127 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 124 Cornering light function ................. 127 Fogged up headlamps .................... 129 General notes ................................ 124 Hazard warning lamps ................... 126 High beam flasher .......................... 126 High-beam headlamps ................... 126 Light switch ................................... 124 Low-beam headlamps .................... 125 Parking lamps ................................ 125 Setting exterior lighting ................. 124 Standing lamps .............................. 125 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 248 Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 247 Turn signals ................................... 126 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 300

Locking see Central locking

Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 90 Emergency locking ........................... 91 From inside (central locking but- ton) .................................................. 89

Locking centrally see Central locking

Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 265 Switching on/off ........................... 125

Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port ................................................ 111

M M+S tires ............................................ 364 Magic Body Control ........................... 194 MAGIC SKY CONTROL ....................... 103 Malfunction message

see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 334 MBC

see Magic Body Control mbrace

Call priority .................................... 313 Display message ............................ 259 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 313 Downloading routes ....................... 316 Emergency call .............................. 310 General notes ................................ 309 Geo fencing ................................... 317 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 315 MB info call button ........................ 312 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 315 Remote vehicle locking .................. 315 Roadside Assistance button .......... 311 Search & Send ............................... 314 Self-test ......................................... 310 Speed alert .................................... 316 System .......................................... 309 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 317 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 314

12 Index

Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 85 General notes .................................. 85 Inserting .......................................... 85 Locking vehicle ................................ 91 Removing ......................................... 85 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90

Media Interface USB port in the armrest of the center console ............................... 302 see Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 240 Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 120

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360camera .................................. 211 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 68 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 222 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 225 Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 215 BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 68 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 69 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 194 Crosswind Assist (vehicles with- out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........... 74 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 190 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 73 General notes ................................ 179 MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 194 Night View Assist Plus ................... 219 PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 61 PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 75 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61 Rear view camera .......................... 207 ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 196 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 217

Message memory (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 251 Messages

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 335

Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... 398 Installation ..................................... 398 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241 Transmission output (maximum) .... 398

Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 84 MOExtended tires .............................. 343 Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 388 Mounting a new wheel ................... 387 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 384 Raising the vehicle ......................... 385 Removing a wheel .......................... 387 Securing the vehicle against roll- ing away ........................................ 384

MP3 Operation ....................................... 240

Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 232

Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 231 Overview .......................................... 35

N Navigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 237 Night View Assist Plus

Activating/deactivating ................. 220 Cleaning ......................................... 337 Display message ............................ 275 Function/notes ............................. 219 Pedestrian and animal recogni- tion ................................................ 219 Problem (malfunction) ................... 222

Index 13

Switching automatic activation on/off ............................................ 244

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- cle ....................................................... 150

O Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 54 Faults ............................................... 58 Operation ......................................... 54 System self-test ............................... 56

Occupant safety Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 62 Children in the vehicle ..................... 62 Important safety notes .................... 45 Introduction to the restraint sys- tem .................................................. 44 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 53 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 45 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 67 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 61 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45

OCS Conditions ....................................... 54 Faults ............................................... 58 Operation ......................................... 54 System self-test ............................... 56

Odometer ........................................... 235 Oil

see Engine oil On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 249 Assistance graphic menu ............... 243 Assistance menu ........................... 244 Display messages .......................... 251 Displaying a service message ........ 330 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 187 Factory settings ............................. 249 Head-up display ............................. 233 Important safety notes .................. 230

Instrument cluster menu ............... 248 Lights menu ................................... 247 Media menu ................................... 240 Menu overview .............................. 235 Message memory .......................... 251 Navigation menu ............................ 237 Operation ....................................... 231 Radio menu ................................... 239 Service menu ................................. 243 Settings menu ............................... 244 Standard display ............................ 235 Telephone menu ............................ 241 Trip menu ...................................... 235 Video DVD operation ..................... 241

Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety notes .................... 25

Operating system see On-board computer

Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 23 Vehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outside temperature display ........... 231 Overhead control panel ...................... 39

P Paint code number ............................ 399 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 333 Panic alarm .......................................... 44 Panorama roof ................................... 101 Parcel net hooks ............................... 303 Parking

Important safety notes .................. 170 Parking brake ................................ 172 Position of exterior mirror, front- passenger side ............................... 119 Rear view camera .......................... 207 Switching off the engine ................ 171 see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid see 360 camera see Active Parking Assist see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera

Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC

14 Index

Parking brake Display message ............................ 255 Electric parking brake .................... 172 Warning lamp ................................. 292

Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 125

PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 201 Driving system ............................... 199 Function/notes ............................. 199 Important safety notes .................. 199 Problem (malfunction) ................... 202 Range of the sensors ..................... 199 Warning display ............................. 200

PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 264 Indicator lamps ................................ 45 Problem (malfunction) ................... 264

Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 144 Perfume vial ................................... 144 Problem (malfunction) ................... 146

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 338 Power locks ......................................... 90 Power washers .................................. 333 Power windows

see Side windows PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Display message ............................ 259 Operation ......................................... 61

PRE-SAFE Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 245 Display message ............................ 260 Function/notes ................................ 75 Important safety notes .................... 75 Warning lamp ................................. 296

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 260 Operation ......................................... 61

Program selector button .................. 163 Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 Immobilizer ...................................... 78

Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 22

Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 154 General notes ................................ 154 Hill start assist ............................... 155

Q QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 28

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26

R Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 239 Radio-wave reception/transmis- sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Reading lamp ..................................... 129 Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 147 Stowage compartment .................. 302

Rear lamps see Lights

Rear seats Overview .......................................... 41

Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 336 Displays in the COMAND display ... 208 Function/notes ............................. 207

Rear window blind ............................ 306 Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 143 Switching on/off ........................... 142

Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 117 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem)

Important safety notes .................. 405 Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 167 Notes for MercedesAMG vehi- cles ................................................ 402

Index 15

Refueling process .......................... 168 see Fuel

Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 317 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 318

Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 130

Reporting safety defects .................... 27 Rescue card ......................................... 28 Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 271 Warning lamp ................................. 293

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 143 Restraint system

Display message ............................ 262 Introduction ..................................... 44 Warning lamp ................................. 292 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Reversing feature Roller sunblind ............................... 101 Side windows ................................... 98 Trunk lid ........................................... 92

Reversing lamps (display mes- sage) ................................................... 267 ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 196 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24 Roller sunblind

Panorama roof ............................... 101 Rear window .................................. 306

Roller sunblind for the panorama roof

Opening and closing ...................... 102 Operating ....................................... 101 Resetting ....................................... 102

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 339 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 406

S Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 62 see Occupant safety see Operating safety

Safety system see Driving safety systems

SD memory card Selecting ........................................ 240

Seat Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat ............. 108

Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and front- passenger seat belt ......................... 50 Cleaning ......................................... 339 Correct usage .................................. 47 Fastening ......................................... 48 Important safety guidelines ............. 46 Introduction ..................................... 46 Releasing ......................................... 49 Warning lamp ................................. 285 Warning lamp (function) ................... 50

Seating Seating comfort package ............... 111

Seating comfort package ................. 111 Seats

Active multicontour seat ................ 111 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port ................................................ 111 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 109 Calling up a stored setting (mem- ory function) .................................. 121 Cleaning the cover ......................... 338 Correct driver's seat position ........ 106 EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system ............. 116 Folding the backrests forward/ back ............................................... 110 Important safety notes .................. 107 Seat backrest display message ..... 283 Seat heating .................................. 111 Seat heating problem .................... 113 Seat ventilation .............................. 113 Seat ventilation problem ................ 114 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 121 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 111 Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 113

Section Wheels and tires ............................ 362

Securing a load see Securing cargo

16 Index

Securing cargo .................................. 303 Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 338 see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 335 Service menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 243 Service message

see ASSYST PLUS Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 403 Coolant (engine) ............................ 404 Engine oil ....................................... 403 Fuel ................................................ 401 Important safety notes .................. 400 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem) ............................................... 405 Washer fluid ................................... 405

Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 249 On-board computer ....................... 244

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 250 Side impact air bag ............................. 52 Side marker lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 267 Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 335 Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Convenience opening feature .......... 99 Important safety information ........... 97 Opening/closing .............................. 98 Problem (malfunction) ................... 101 Resetting ....................................... 100 Reversing feature ............................. 98

SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 86 Changing the programming ............. 84 Checking the battery ....................... 86 Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Convenience opening feature .......... 99 Display message ............................ 283 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 83 Important safety notes .................... 82 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 84 Loss ................................................. 87 Mechanical key ................................ 85 Overview .......................................... 82

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 151 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87 Starting the engine ........................ 153

Smartphone Starting the engine ........................ 154

Snow chains ...................................... 365 Sockets

Center console .............................. 307 General notes ................................ 307 Rear compartment ......................... 307 Trunk ............................................. 308

Special seat belt retractor .................. 63 Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi- tional speedometer ........................ 248 Digital ............................................ 237 In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Selecting the display unit ............... 248 see Instrument cluster

Standing lamps Display message ............................ 267 Switching on/off ........................... 125

Start/Stop button General notes ................................ 151 Key positions ................................. 152 Removing ....................................... 153 Starting the engine ........................ 154

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 153 STEER CONTROL .................................. 77 Steering

Display message ............................ 283 Warning lamps ............................... 298

Steering Assist see DISTRONIC PLUS

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 278 Steering assistant STEER CON- TROL

see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 114

Index 17

Button overview ............................... 35 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 231 Cleaning ......................................... 338 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 116 Important safety notes .................. 114 Paddle shifters ............................... 163 Steering wheel heating .................. 115 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 121

Steering wheel heating Problem (malfunction) ................... 116 Switching on/off ........................... 115

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 163 Stop&Go Pilot

see DISTRONIC PLUS Stowage areas ................................... 300 Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 302 Center console .............................. 301 Center console in rear compart- ment .............................................. 302 Cup holders ................................... 304 Door ............................................... 302 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 301 Glove box ....................................... 301 Important safety information ......... 300 Rear ............................................... 302 Rear seat backrest ......................... 302 Stowage net ................................... 303 see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 303 Stowage space

Parcel net retainers ....................... 303 Securing a load .............................. 303

Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... 303 Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 364 Sun visor ............................................ 305 Suspension tuning

Active Body Control ABC ............... 195 AIRMATIC ...................................... 198 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 250

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 143

T Tachometer ........................................ 230 Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 266 see Lights

Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 33

Technical data Capacities ...................................... 400 Information .................................... 398 Tires/wheels ................................. 388 Vehicle data ................................... 406

Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 242 Display message ............................ 283 Introduction ................................... 241 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241 Number from the phone book ........ 242 Redialing ........................................ 243 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 242

Temperature Coolant .......................................... 231 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 249 Outside temperature ...................... 231 Setting (climate control) ................ 140 Transmission oil (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 249

Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 369 Checking manually ........................ 368 Display message ............................ 279 Maximum ....................................... 368 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 346 Notes ............................................. 367 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 346 Recommended ............................... 365

Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure elec- tronically ........................................ 370 Function/notes ............................. 369 General notes ................................ 369 Important safety notes .................. 369 Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... 372 Restarting ...................................... 371

18 Index

Warning lamp ................................. 297 Warning message .......................... 371

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 344 Tire pressure not reached .............. 346 Tire pressure reached .................... 346

Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 382 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 381 Bar (definition) ............................... 381 Changing a wheel .......................... 383 Characteristics .............................. 381 Checking ........................................ 363 Curb weight (definition) ................. 382 Definition of terms ......................... 381 Direction of rotation ...................... 384 Display message ............................ 279 Distribution of the vehicle occu- pants (definition) ............................ 383 DOT (Department of Transporta- tion) (definition) ............................. 381 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... 380 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... 381 General notes ................................ 388 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- inition) ........................................... 381 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) (definition) .............................. 382 Important safety notes .................. 362 Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... 381 Information on driving .................... 362 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 382 Labeling (overview) ........................ 377 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 383 Load index ..................................... 379 Load index (definition) ................... 382 Maximum load on a tire (defini- tion) ............................................... 382 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... 382 Maximum permissible tire pres- sure (definition) ............................. 382 Maximum tire load ......................... 380 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 382 MOExtended tires .......................... 364

Optional equipment weight (defi- nition) ............................................ 382 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- inition) ........................................... 382 Replacing ....................................... 383 Service life ..................................... 364 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 382 Snow chains .................................. 365 Speed rating (definition) ................ 381 Storing ........................................... 384 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 381 Summer tires in winter .................. 364 Temperature .................................. 377 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 383 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 382 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 382 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 381 Tire size (data) ............................... 388 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 377 Tire tread ....................................... 363 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 382 Total load limit (definition) ............. 383 Traction ......................................... 376 Traction (definition) ....................... 383 Tread wear ..................................... 376 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 376 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 381 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 383 Wheel and tire combination ........... 391 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 381 see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 65 Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 356 Important safety notes .................. 354

Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 354 Installing the towing eye ................ 355 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 356 Removing the towing eye ............... 355 Transporting the vehicle ................ 356 With both axles on the ground ....... 355 With the rear axle raised ................ 356

Index 19

Towing eye ......................................... 342 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating ....................................... 218 Display message ............................ 276 Function/notes ............................. 217 Important safety notes .................. 217 Instrument cluster display ............. 218 Switching on/off ........................... 245

Transfer case ..................................... 167 Transmission

see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 356 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 338 Trip computer (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 236 Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 235 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 237

Trunk Emergency release .......................... 96 Important safety notes .................... 92 Locking separately ........................... 96 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 95 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 92 Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 94 Power closing .................................. 90

Trunk lid Display message ............................ 282 Obstacle recognition ........................ 92 Opening dimensions ...................... 406 Opening/closing .............................. 92

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 406 Turn signals

Display message ............................ 265 Switching on/off ........................... 126

Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 398 Installation ..................................... 398 Transmission output (maximum) .... 398 Windshield (infrared reflective) ...... 321

Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate

U Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 89

Upshift indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 249

V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 305 Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 281 Electronics ..................................... 398 Equipment ....................................... 23 Individual settings .......................... 244 Limited Warranty ............................. 27 Loading .......................................... 372 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 91 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 83 Lowering ........................................ 388 Maintenance .................................... 24 Operating safety .............................. 25 Parking .......................................... 170 Parking for a long period ................ 173 Pulling away ................................... 154 Raising ........................................... 385 Reporting problems ......................... 27 Securing from rolling away ............ 384 Towing away .................................. 354 Transporting .................................. 356 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 83 Vehicle data ................................... 406

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 406 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 91 Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 399 Vehicle level

Active Body Control ABC ............... 194 AIRMATIC ...................................... 197 Display message ............................ 272

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 342

20 Index

Video Operating the DVD ......................... 241

VIN ...................................................... 399

W Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 288 Brakes ........................................... 287 Check Engine ................................. 293 Coolant .......................................... 294 Distance warning ........................... 296 ESP .............................................. 290 ESP OFF ....................................... 291 Fuel tank ........................................ 293 General notes ................................ 285 Overview .......................................... 34 Parking brake ................................ 292 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 45 Reserve fuel ................................... 293 Restraint system ............................ 292 Seat belt ........................................ 285 Steering ......................................... 298 Tire pressure monitor .................... 297

Warranty .............................................. 23 Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 283 Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 391 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 388 Wheel chock ...................................... 384 Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 383 Checking ........................................ 363 Cleaning ......................................... 334 General notes ................................ 388 Important safety notes .................. 362 Information on driving .................... 362 Interchanging/changing ................ 383 Mounting a new wheel ................... 387 Mounting a wheel .......................... 384 Removing a wheel .......................... 387 Snow chains .................................. 365 Storing ........................................... 384 Tightening torque ........................... 388 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 388

Window curtain air bag Operation ......................................... 53

Windows see Side windows

Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 141 Infrared reflective .......................... 321

Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 329 Notes ............................................. 405

Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 133 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 131 Switching on/off ........................... 130

Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 364 Slippery road surfaces ................... 178 Snow chains .................................. 365

Winter operation Summer tires ................................. 364

Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 364

Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 335 Important safety notes .................. 131 Replacing ....................................... 131

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 338 Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 21

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmen- tally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- tion.

Environmental concerns and recom- mendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regen- erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajor assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- tems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

22 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel- evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been spe- cifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main- tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addi- tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- ters provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification num- ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- Benz parts (Y page 399).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possi- ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and func- tions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all sys- tems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordancewith the followingwarranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys- tem Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov- ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces- sories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War- ranty Information booklet, have an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and War- ranty Information booklet will be posted to you.

Introduction 23

Z

Information for customers in Califor- nia Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- sonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- tion has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly noti- fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- tion of a less serious nature than cate- gory (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Book- let with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser- vice advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Breakdown assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programoffers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis- tance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own- ership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim- ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con- tacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

24 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic convertermay not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic con- verter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/mainte- nance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under- carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of

Introduction 25

Z

an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on con- tinuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- ation is subject to the following two condi- tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- ful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper- ation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, includ- ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip- ment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test dur- ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec- essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- fications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety.

26 Introduction

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- let. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifica- tions Rwork on electronic components

Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driv- ing your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe vehicle technical data Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con- tact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify- ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Introduction 27

Z

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current res- cue card contains the most important infor- mation about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recording This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic information relating to vehicle operation,mal- functions, and user settings. This may include information about the performance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys- tems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehi- cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle func- tions.

COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicles operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehiclemay be compiled through COMAND or thembrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in under- standing how a vehicles systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of per- sonal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforce- ment, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

28 Introduction

("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia- bility arising from the extraction of this infor- mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per- sonnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local gov- ernment; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR com- ponent may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp- ted. This means that in the event of such con- flict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General information Information on license for free and open- source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the fol- lowing website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource

Introduction 29

Z

30

Cockpit ................................................. 32 Instrument cluster .............................. 33 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35 Center console .................................... 37 Overhead control panel ...................... 39 Door control panel .............................. 40 Rear seats ............................................ 41

31

At a gl an ce

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shifters 163

; Combination switch 126

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 33

A DIRECT SELECT lever 159

B Overhead control panel 39

C Control panel for: Lowering the rear seat head restraints 110 u Extending/retracting the rear roller sunblind 306 Moving the seat-belt extender forwards 48 PASSENGER AIR BAG indi- cator lamp 45 Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster light- ing and the COMAND dis- play

D Climate control systems 136

Function Page

E Ignition lock 151 Start/Stop button 151

F Adjusts the steering wheel 114 Steering wheel heating 115

G Cruise control lever 180

H Electric parking brake 172

I Diagnostics connection 26

J Opens the hood 324

K Light switch 124

L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot 190 Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist 225 Deactivating PARKTRONIC 199 Switching on the360 cam- era 211 Activating Night View Assist 219 Switching on the head-up display 233

32 Cockpit At

a gl an ce

Instrument cluster

Displays

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Multifunction display 232

= Tachometer 230

? Coolant temperature 231

Function Page

A Fuel gauge Fuel filler flap location indi- cator8: the fuel filler cap is on the right-hand side.

i Information on displaying the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 231).

Instrument cluster 33

At a gl an ce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: ! ABS 288

; ESP OFF 290 ESP 290

= # Turn signal, left 126

? L Low-beam head- lamps 125

A K High-beam head- lamps 126

B T Parking lamps, license plate lamps and instrument cluster lighting 125

C ! Turn signal, right 126

D Distance warning sig- nal 296

Function Page

E ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 292

F Electric parking brake (red) 292 F USA only ! Canada only

G ; Check Engine 293

H Power steering 298

I Brakes (red) 287 $ USA only J Canada only

J Seat belt 285

K 6 Restraint system 292

L h Tire pressure monitor 297

34 Instrument cluster At

a gl an ce

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 232

; Sets the brightness of the instrument cluster and the displays (COMAND) 230

= COMAND display (see the separate operating instruc- tions)

? DVD changer or the single DVDdrive (see the separate operating instructions)

A Controller and buttons (see the separate operating instructions)

Function Page

B ~

Rejects or ends a call 241 Exits the telephone book/ redial memory 6

Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redialmem- ory WX

Adjusts the volume 8

Mute

Switches on the Voice Con- trol System (see the sepa- rate operating instructions)

Multifunction steering wheel 35

At a gl an ce

Function Page

C

Opens the menu list 9:

Selects amenu or submenu or scrolls through lists 231 a

Confirms a selection 231 Hides display messages 251 %

Back 231

Switches off the Voice Con- trol System (see the sepa- rate operating instructions)

36 Multifunction steering wheel At

a gl an ce

Center console

Function Page

: Switches COMAND on/off (see the separate Opera- tor's Manual)

; Adjusts the volume/mute (see the separate operating instructions)

= ECO start/stop func- tion 157

? Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions) Telephone keypad (see the separate operating instruc- tions)

A Sets the vehicle level 194, 197

B Adjusts the suspension set- tings

195, 197

C Selects the drive pro- gram/program selector button 163 Selects the drive pro- gram/program selector button (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 163

Function Page

D Back button (see the sepa- rate operating instructions)

E Seat adjustment button (see the separate operating instructions)

F Navigation button (see the separate operating instruc- tions)

G Radio button (see the sep- arate operating instruc- tions)

H Hazard warning lamps 126

I Media button (see the sep- arate operating instruc- tions)

J Telephone, address book and Internet button (see separate operating instruc- tions)

Center console 37

At a gl an ce

Function Page

K Vehicle and system set- tings button (see separate operating instructions)

Function Page

L COMAND controller (see the separate operating instructions)

38 Center console At

a gl an ce

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left- hand reading lamp on/off 129

; | Switches the auto- matic interior lighting con- trol on/off 129

= G SOS button (mbrace system) 310

? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 129

A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 129

B p Switches the right- hand reading lamp on/off 129

C MB Info call button (mbrace system) 312

D Eyeglasses compartment 301

E Operates the roller sun- blind for the panorama roof 101

Function Page

F Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL 103 Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: operates the roller sunblind for the panorama roof 101

G Buttons for the garage door opener 318

H Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instruc- tions

I F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace sys- tem) 311

Overhead control panel 39

At a gl an ce

Door control panel

Function Page

: s Seat ventilation 113

; c Seat heating 111

= w Adjusts the front- passenger seat from the driver's seat 108

? r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steer- ing wheel 120

A Adjusts the seats electri- cally 108

B 7Z\ Adjusts and folds the exte- rior mirrors in/out electri- cally 118

Function Page

C W Opens/closes the right side window 97

D W Opens/closes the rear right side window 97

E p Opens/closes the trunk lid 95

F W Opens/closes the rear left side window 97

G Opens the door 89

H %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 89

I WOpens/closes the left side window 97

40 Door control panel At

a gl an ce

Rear seats

Function Page

: Stowage box in the seat backrest 302 Coolbox 308

; Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest 302

Function Page

= Cup holder 305

? Stowage compartment in the center console 302 Socket 307

Rear seats 41

At a gl an ce

42

Useful information .............................. 44 Panic alarm .......................................... 44 Occupant safety .................................. 44 Children in the vehicle ........................ 62 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67 Driving safety systems ....................... 67 Protection against theft ..................... 78

43

Sa fe ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for at least one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press! button: again.

or X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also

reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system RAir bags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing systems The components of the restraint systemwork in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 47) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 107).

As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the cor- rect driver's seat position (Y page 106). You also have tomake sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 50). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehi- cle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is suffi- cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the out- side. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emer- gency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 59). For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62).

44 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Important safety notes

G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function andmay fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information con- tact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is run- ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec- ted in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni- tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unin- tentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of

vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; are part of the Occupant Classifica- tion System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

Depending on the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age

Occupant safety 45

Sa fe ty

Z

and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Clas- sification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62). There youwill also find instructions on rear- ward and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the clas- sification of the person in the front- passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 53). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts (Y page 46) and "Air bags" (Y page 50). There you can also find infor- mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occu- pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- tion in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt extender quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the rout- ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.

When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi- cle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may oth- erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer- gency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- not protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi- tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position.When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

46 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- tional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- tion of this Operator's Manual (Y page 62) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi- fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi- fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten- sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 46). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the jour- ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- rectly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted.

Occupant safety 47

Sa fe ty

Z

Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdo- men. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sit- ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cush- ions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 300).

Fastening seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 47).

G WARNING If the seat-belt extender is extended during the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly on the body. The seat belt can then no longer perform its intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always make sure that the seat-belt extender is retracted during a journey.

Seat-belt extender

The seat-belt extender for the driver and front passenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seat-belt extender= is extended when the respective door is closed and the SmartKey is turned to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

You can also extend seat-belt extender= with seat-belt extender button?.

48 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

X Press seat-belt extender button?. Seat-belt extender= extends.

Seat-belt extender= is retracted again if: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle. Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within 60 seconds. In this case, you can extend seat-belt extender= again. Press seat-belt extender button? again. Rthe respective door is opened. Rthe SmartKey is turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it forwards. Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied after approximately five seconds. If you press seat-belt extender button? after this, seat-belt extender= will not extend.

Basic illustration X Adjust the seat (Y page 106). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt extender= and engage belt tongue; into belt buckle:. The seat belt on the drivers seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened

automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 63).

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Basic illustration X Press release button:, hold belt tongue; firmly and guide it back towards seat-belt extender=.

Occupant safety 49

Sa fe ty

Z

Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front- passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle when the seat-belt extender is retracted and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using COMAND. Information on acti- vating and deactivating the seat-belt adjust- ment function can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 285).

Air bags

Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be rec- ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fas- tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protec- tion in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function inde- pendently from one another (Y page 59). However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

50 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly andmaintain the great- est possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out- side. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may other- wise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- erwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats.

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 45). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- tem (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- vent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Do not place any objects on the dashboard e.g. above the front-passenger front air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it.

Occupant safety 51

Sa fe ty

Z

G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door panel- ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door pan- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- tional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 45). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen- sor readings, detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied (Y page 53).

The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 54) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer- ing column and front-passenger knee bag; under the glove box. The driver's and front- passenger knee bags are triggered together with the front air bags. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Side impact air bags

G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags inte- grated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the func- tion of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

52 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Front side impact air bags: and rear side impact air bags; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side (front) deploys under the fol- lowing conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front- passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci- dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy- ment is independent of whether the front- passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window cur- tain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 59).

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front- passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Occupant safety 53

Sa fe ty

Z

Prerequisite To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi- ble

If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- fication, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- selves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back- rest and the head restraint position accord- ingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

Occupant Classification System opera- tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag displaymessage appears in the instru- ment cluster (Y page 264). When the front- passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten- tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger

54 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

front air bag both before and during the jour- ney.

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front- passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct.

G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problemswith the

Occupant Classification System" (Y page 58).

G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle seat-belt extender to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the retracted seat-belt extender. If necessary, adjust the front- passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a stand- ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up permanently after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air

Occupant safety 55

Sa fe ty

Z

bag is activated. The result of the classifi- cation is dependent on, among other fac- tors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suit- able rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alterna- tively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature correspond- ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi- cle" (Y page 62). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by quali- fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec- essary repair work carried out at an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front- passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceler- ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- pant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dash- board. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

56 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS oper- ation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp display the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 54). For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 58).

Occupant safety 57

Sa fe ty

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit, even though the front- passenger seat is occu- pied by an adult or a person of a stature cor- responding to that of an adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorrect. X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per- son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: Runoccupied Roccupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as pos- sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec- essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front- passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

58 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- tection and cannot provide the intended pro- tection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- ist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- sioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- ble. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also

be released. The 6 restraint system warn- ing lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released gener- ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory prob- lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out of the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it is safe to do so. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- rial, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guide- lines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm.

Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates impor- tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler- ation or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron- tal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 45) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independ- ently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of

Occupant safety 59

Sa fe ty

Z

the restraint system are activated independ- ently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags as well as driver's and front- passenger knee bags RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- mines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front- passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 45). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of pro- pellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel- eration or acceleration which occurs at vari- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- tion and the direction of the force are essen- tially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- sion Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- cle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment.

The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of decel- eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon- gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint sys- tem are activated independently of each other depending on the apparent type of acci- dent. RSide impact air bags on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tension- ing Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and in the rear compart- ment seats The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys- tem determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer addi- tional protection to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different air bag systems work independently of each other.

60 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

How the air bag system works is deter- mined by the severity of the accident detec- ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of acci- dent: Rfrontal collision Rside impact Rrollover

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan- ger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE system, the possibility of per- sonal injuries occurring as a result of an acci- dent cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- fully.

Function

PRE-SAFE intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance pack- age: when a driver assistance system inter- venes powerfully or the radar sensor sys- tem detects an imminent danger of colli- sion in certain situations

PRE-SAFE takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detec- ted: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rif the vehicle skids, the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the side win- dows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased.

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with mul- ticontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. Infor- mation about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50).

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear- end collision is imminent. In certain hazard- ous situations, PRE-SAFE PLUS takes pre-

Occupant safety 61

Sa fe ty

Z

emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notes

The intervention of PRE-SAFE PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes. PRE-SAFE PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up. When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE PLUS will not apply the brakes.

Function

PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes in certain situa- tions if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE PLUS takes the following meas- ures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehi- cle is stationary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE PLUS braking application is canceled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon- ger detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored.

Automatic measures after an acci- dent Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup- ply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer- gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better pro- tected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classifica- tion System (OCS)" (Y page 53)

62 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- ting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 46) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 47). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fas- tened without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv- er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Make sure you observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

X Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of the seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt out of the belt sash guide.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Children in the vehicle 63

Sa fe ty

Z

Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Make sure you observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle, hold the seat belt tongue and route it to the seat belt extender in front or the belt sash guide in the rear compartment. The special seat belt retractor is deactiva- ted.

Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- tems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cush- ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in

the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, strik- ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 300).

G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- tems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- ing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again.

The securing systems of child restraint sys- tems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages (Coupe only) If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classifica- tion System (OCS)" (Y page 53). There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.

64 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

All child restraint systems must meet the fol- lowing standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- ards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are inclu- ded with the child restraint system. Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte- rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- ing system

G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO- FIX) securing rings

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; on the rear seats are covered by folding upholstered lining= with Velcro fastening. X Fold upholstered lining= upwards. X Turn support: by 90. Upholstered lining= remains folded upwards.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO- FIX) securing rings;.

After you have removed the LATCH-type (ISO- FIX) child restraint system, you must turn support: on upholstered lining= by 90 again. Then fold upholstery lining= down. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- tions.

Top Tether

Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint sys-

Children in the vehicle 65

Sa fe ty

Z

tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

Top Tether anchorages The Top Tether anchorage points are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move head restraint: upwards. X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage =.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under head restraint:between the twohead restraint bars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage=. Make sure that Top Tether beltA is not twisted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufactur- er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchor- age=.

X If necessary, move head restraint: back down again slightly (Y page 110). Make sure that you do not interfere with the cor- rect routing of Top Tether beltA.

Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat

General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to read and follow the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS)" (Y page 53). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front- passenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- board

Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear- ward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45) is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva- ted.

66 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cush- ion length. The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint sys- tem must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the front-passenger seat-belt extender to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the retracted seat-belt extender for the front-passenger seat. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-

cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- cle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 68) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68) RBASPLUS (BrakeAssistSystemPLUS)with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 69) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and Adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 70) RESP (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 73) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 75) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 75) RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 75) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 77)

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for stay- ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather condi- tions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Driving safety systems 67

Sa fe ty

Z

The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 362). Inwintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehi- cle when braking. The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking charac- teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- ally, further driving safety systems are deac- tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- ding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 288) and

display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 252).

Braking X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- tion of hazardous road conditions, and func- tions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information BAS operates in emergency braking situa- tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

68 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General information BAS PLUS can help you tominimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" sec- tion (Y page 67).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a cam- era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi- cal characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera sys- tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 69).

Important safety notes

G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene

There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo- ple, this is especially the case if they are mov- ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- ognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen- sor system detection range

Driving safety systems 69

Sa fe ty

Z

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov- ered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis- tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera systemchecked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possi- ble moment. When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traf- fic situation.

BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- ardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi- cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robjects crossing your path and that are recognized in the detection range of the sensors

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger pro- tection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activa- ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- tion as usual again, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

General information COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con- sists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you

70 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COL- LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the notes in the section on break- ing-in (Y page 150).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Distance warning function

General information The distancewarning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 67).

G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function.

Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- tivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 245).

If the distance warning function is not activa- ted, the symbol appears in the assis- tance graphics display. Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Driving safety systems 71

Sa fe ty

Z

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- tions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLI- SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to criti- cal driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph (105 km/h) for moving objects Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph (50 km/h) for stationary objects

If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- tance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation.

G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving condi- tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter- vene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col- lision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a colli- sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap- tive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.

72 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activa- ted simultaneously. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

ESP monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

ETS traction control is part of ESP. On vehi- cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP. Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is trans- ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ing safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on ESP (Y page 356) when towing the vehi- cle with a raised rear axle. ESP is only deactivated if the warning lamp is lit continuously. If the warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunc- tion. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 290) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 252). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP function properly.

Characteristics of ESP

General information If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP is automatically active. If ESP intervenes, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

Driving safety systems 73

Sa fe ty

Z

If ESP intervenes: X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum- stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automati- callywhen the driverwants to pull away again. ESP remains in its previously selected sta- tus.Example: if ESPwas deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

You can select between the following states of ESP: RESP is activated. RESP is deactivated.

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol- lowing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel

i Activate ESP as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-

cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP

You can deactivate or activate ESP via the on-board computer (Y page 74). ESP deactivated: The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP activated: The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP is deactivated If ESP is deactivated and one ormorewheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- tions, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP: RESP no longer improves driving stability. Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- ting action for better traction on loose sur- faces. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

Crosswind Assist (vehicles without MAGIC BODY CONTROL)

General information Vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: infor- mation on stabilizing the vehicle in the event of crosswind (Y page 194). Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into ESP significantly reduces these effects.

74 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

ESP intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP is deactivated or disabled because of a mal- function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)

General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 288) as well as dis- play messages (Y page 255).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE

also has the HOLD function (Y page 192) and hill start assist (Y page 155).

PRE-SAFE Brake

General information

PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic brak- ing.

i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" sec- tion (Y page 67).

PRESAFE Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For PRE-SAFE Brake to assist you when driv- ing, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be opera- tional. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehi- cle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body con- tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 75).

Important safety notes

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake will initially brake your vehi- cle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes

Driving safety systems 75

Sa fe ty

Z

a collision cannot always be avoided, partic- ularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is brakedwith up to 50% of the full braking pressure.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- tify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake cannot inter- vene. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col- lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering

As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit- uations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- ognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov- ered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis- tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi- cle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera

76 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

systemchecked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- tivate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 245). If the PRE-SAFE Brake is not activated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

PRE-SAFE Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approx- imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi- cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Auto- matic emergency braking is not performed

until immediately prior to an imminent acci- dent. You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- SAFE Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in partic- ular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 67).

No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP is malfunctioning. Rthe lighting is faulty. Power steering will, however, continue to function.

Driving safety systems 77

Sa fe ty

Z

Protection against theft

Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any- one can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be star- ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys- tem is armed after approximately 10 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood X To turn the alarmoffwith the SmartKey: press the% or& button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off.

or X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The Smart- Key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.

or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Cus- tomer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection.

78 Protection against theft Sa fe ty

The emergency call system sends a mes- sage or establishes a data connection pro- vided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser- vice. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available.

Protection against theft 79

Sa fe ty

Z

80

Useful information .............................. 82 SmartKey ............................................. 82 Doors .................................................... 89 Trunk .................................................... 92 Side windows ...................................... 97 Panorama roof ................................... 101

81

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A checkwhich periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhilst driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing

82 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle ; F To open/close the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press button=. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rthe anti-theft alarm system is armed again.

X To lock centrally: press button:. The key centrally locks/unlocks the following components: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). The visual and audible confirmation is given upon locking only if all components were suc- cessfully locked. When the surround lighting is activated in COMAND, it comes on when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked using the remote con- trol. Information on activating and deactivat- ing the surround lighting can be found in the separate operating instructions.

X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold button; until the trunk lid opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes Bear inmind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con- ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the cor- responding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A checkwhich periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhilst driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing

SmartKey 83

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- face: or;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface; for an exten- ded period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 99).

Deactivating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the& button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated .

X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea- tures are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function Bear inmind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle.

Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. Thismeans that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre- quently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the% and& buttons simulta- neously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 86). i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehi- cle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but- ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- lows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur- face of the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the% and& buttons simultaneously for approximately six sec-

84 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

onds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 86).

Mechanical key

General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). If you unlock the vehicle using themechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 90) Runlocking the trunk (Y page 96) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 91)

Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey 85

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp: lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 86). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 85).

X Press mechanical key; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover:

opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart- ment cover: into the housing first and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart- Key.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

86 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 86) and replace it if nec- essary (Y page 86).

If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 86) and replace it if nec- essary (Y page 86).

If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Unlock (Y page 90) or lock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 91) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey 87

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 349).

or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 351). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using theStart/ Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehi- cle.

The vehicle is locked. X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 86) and replace it if nec- essary (Y page 86).

If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart- Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work- shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the mechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

88 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside i When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side win- dows have iced up. It will then not be pos- sible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window.

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEY- LESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will

trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).

X Pull door handle;. If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up. The door is unlocked and opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The buttons are located on both doors.

X To unlock: press button:. X To lock: press button;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. If the driver's door is open, the door stays unlocked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

Doors 89

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

The doors can be opened from the inside. If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart- Key orwith KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys- tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).

i If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

i You can switch the automatic locking function on and off using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Power closing Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. X To power close a door: push the door into the lock up to the first detent position. Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the trunk lid: lightly push the trunk lid closed. The power closing function pulls the trunk lid closed.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- ical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 85).

X Insert the mechanical key into opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

90 Doors Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1. The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- Key (Y page 85).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani- cal key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 89). X Check whether the locking knob on the front-passenger door is still visible. Press the locking knob down by hand, if neces- sary.

X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 85).

X Insert the mechanical key into opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position1. The locking knob drops down and the driv- er's door is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked.

Doors 91

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- Key (Y page 85).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 406).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).

Obstacle recognition with trunk lid reversing feature On vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea- ture, the trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stop- ped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentive- ness when opening and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement

This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- uations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid

Opening/closing automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More- over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.

92 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 406).

Opening You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey. X Press and hold theF button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

Closing You can close the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the closing button in the trunk lid.

X Press and release closing button: on the trunk lid.

or X If the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle: press theF but- ton on the SmartKey. You can release the button as soon as the trunk lid starts to close.

X To stop the closing process: RPress theF button on the SmartKey, or RPress closing button: or locking but- ton; on the trunk lid, or RPress the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or RIn vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick into the sensor detection range under the bumper with your foot. i If theF button on the SmartKey is pressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initi- ated after the closing process is stopped, the trunk lid opens.

Trunk 93

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when all the doors are closed, you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The SmartKey must be located to the rear of the vehicle. X Press and release locking button; on the trunk lid. If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehicle locks. i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking move- ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec- tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands

full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhenmaking the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clear- ance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kick- ingmovementwithin the detection range of sensors:. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Oth- erwise, the sensors may not function cor- rectly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND- FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or closed unin- tentionally, for example, if you: - sit on the edge of the trunk. - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situa-

94 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

tions similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the trunk. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors: may restrict functionality. RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.

Operation

X To open/close: kick into sensor detection range: under the bumper with your foot. You will hear a warning tone while the trunk lid is opening or closing.

X If the trunk lid does not open after sev- eral attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again. i If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs.

To stop the opening or closing procedure: Rkick with your leg in the sensor detection range: under the bumper or Rpress the closing button in the trunk lid or Rpress theF button on the SmartKey If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will open.

If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will close.

Opening/closing automatically from inside

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More- over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 406).

Trunk 95

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Opening and closing

You can open and close the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To open: pull remote operating switch for trunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid: until the trunk lid is com- pletely closed.

Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened.

Activating the function to lock the trunk sep- arately: X Close the trunk lid. X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked.

i You can also lock the glove box (Y page 301).

Deactivating the function to lock the trunk separately: X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position:. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the SmartKey, or Rusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS, or Rusing the remote operating switch in the door control panel: Use the emergency release.

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 85).

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

96 Trunk Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Slide the tip of the mechanical key into opening= and turn. The lock cover is levered off.

1 Basic position 2 To unlock X Insert the mechanical key into the lock as far as the stop.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1 counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position2. The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- Key.

X Close the lock cover. X Swing cover; upwards until it engages. X Fold up the rear seat armrest.

Trunk emergency release You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon- nected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button: flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button: flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side win- dow and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side win- dow during the opening procedure. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody

Side windows 97

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi- cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts one of the front side win- dows from traveling upwards during the auto- matic closing process, the sidewindowopens again automatically. During the manual clos- ing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- uations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win- dows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the front- passenger door. The switches on the driver's door take prec- edence.

: Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor- responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the cor- responding switch.

X To close the front side windows fully: pull the corresponding switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again. i You can continue to operate the side win- dows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a door.

98 Side windows Op

en in g an d cl os in g

i Before opening or closing the side win- dows, a check is carried out to see whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle, if: Ra side window switch is pressed or pulled and Rthe Start/Stop button is used instead of the SmartKey in the ignition lock and Rthe engine is not running This is carried out by means of a brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey.

Convenience opening

General notes You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience opening function is available. The "convenience opening" feature is also available on unlocked vehicles. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv- er's seat

Convenience opening X Keep the% button pressed until the side windows are in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- ing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is oper- ating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can close the windows at the same time. You can then close the roller sunblinds.

i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side window (Y page 98) Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 101)

Using the SmartKey X Press and hold the& button until the side windows are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows are closed.

X Press and hold the& button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GO The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed.

Side windows 99

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sen- sor surface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows are closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle again until the roller sunblind of the panorama roof closes.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface: on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is com- pletely closed (Y page 98).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side win- dow is completely closed (Y page 98).

X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it

has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

100 Side windows Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

X Remove the objects. X Close the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roof

Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama roof

Important safety notes

G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop- ped.

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight.

Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind automatically

Panorama roof 101

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

opens again a little. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attention when closing the roller sun- blind.

G WARNING The reversing feature especially does not react to soft, light and thin objects such as small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trap- ped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sunblind

: To open ; To open = To close X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Press the3 switch in direction: or pull it in direction;. The roller sunblind opens.

X Pull the3 switch in direction=. The roller sunblind closes. i If you press or pull the3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding

direction. You can stop automatic opera- tion by pressing or pulling again.

Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: you can also start and cancel automatic oper- ation using button:. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Press button:. RIf the roller sunblind is completely closed, it is automatically opened fully. RIf the roller sunblind is not completely closed, it is automatically closed fully. RIf the roller sunblind is in motion, auto- matic operation is canceled.

Resetting the roller sunblind for the panorama roof

Reset the roller sunblind if it does not operate smoothly.

102 Panorama roof Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow: until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi- tional second.

X Make sure that the roller sunblind (Y page 101) can be opened fully again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

X If the roller sunblind still does not operate smoothly, please contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the transparency of which can be changed by applying electrical voltage. MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states.

i MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automat- ically after a short period when you turn the SmartKey to position 0 or remove it.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the headliner behind the panorama roof is damaged or removed, electrical com- ponents will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the headliner behind the panorama roof. RIf the headliner is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON- TROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected behind the head- liner. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage trans- former is stamped with a high-voltage sym- bol, warning you about the high voltage. The electric cables of the high-voltage section are color orange.

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151). MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta- tus it was set to before the engine was switched off.

X To change the degree of transparency: press button:.

i At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time.

Panorama roof 103

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

104

Useful information ............................ 106 Correct driver's seat position .......... 106 Seats .................................................. 107 Steering wheel .................................. 114 Mirrors ............................................... 117 Memory function ............................... 120

105

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 107).

X Check whether you have adjusted seat= properly (Y page 108).

When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjus- ted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 114).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus- ted properly (Y page 114).

When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 46).

X Check whether you have fastened seat belt; properly (Y page 48).

The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul- der Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints

106 Correct driver's seat position Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir- ror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traf- fic conditions (Y page 118).

X Store the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 121).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 50) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 62).

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- ment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- tem.

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat

Seats 107

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating mate- rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be dam- aged.

Adjusting the seats

Adjusting the driver's seat electrically

: Head restraint height ; Head restraint height = Seat height ? Seat cushion angle A Seat cushion length B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment C Backrest angle You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 121).

i If PRE-SAFE is triggered, the front- passenger seat will be moved to a better

position if it was previously in an unfavora- ble position (Y page 61).

i To ensure the largest possible range of seat settings, certain seat adjustment func- tions will automatically activate other seat adjustment functions.

i The head restraint height is adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the drivers seat

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62).

G WARNING The front-air bags for could also injure the vehicle occupants in the front If the front seats are positioned too close to the dash- board or steering wheel. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always adjust the front seats so that they are as far from the front air bags as possible. Also observe the notes on the correct adjustment of the seats.

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

108 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the parcel net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

The SmartKeymust be in the ignition lock and in position 1 or 2, in order for the front- passenger seat to be selected (Y page 151). X To select the front-passenger seat: press button: repeatedly until the indi- cator lamp in the button lights up.

When the indicator lamp in button: lights up, for the front-passenger seat you can adjust: Radjust the seat (Y page 108) Rseat heating (Y page 111) Rseat ventilation (Y page 113) Rthe memory function to call up or save set- tings (Y page 120).

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

General notes Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 107). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head.

Seats 109

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position.

X To move backwards: press and hold release button:.

X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly.

Adjusting the front head restraints elec- trically The height of the front head restraints can be adjusted using the seat adjustment switch (Y page 108).

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Lowering electrically from the front

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Briefly press button:. The head restraints lower.

Extending from the front electrically X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Briefly press button: again. The head restraints extend upwards.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height mechanically (Coupe)

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position.

Folding the front seat backrests forward/back

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold forwards during a braking maneuver or in the event of an accident, for example. The seat backrest will then push the vehicle occupant against the seat belt. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. There is an increased risk of injury. Before each journey,make sure that the back- rest engages fully as described.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

110 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 50) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62).

Folding the seat backrest forward The seat moves forwards as soon as you fold the backrest forwards. Thismakes it easier for passengers to get into and out of the rear compartment. The head restraint is lowered in the process and the seat moves forwards.

X Pull seat release handle: forwards and fold the backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat automatically moves to the fore- most position and the head restraint is low- ered.

Folding the seat backrest back X Fold back the backrest horizontally until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this will be shown in themultifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. The seat moves automatically to the last position.

Adjusting the active multicontour seat The settings for the active multicontour seat are only activated if: Rthe seat is occupied Rthe seat belt is fastened. Vehicles installed with the Seat Comfort package: you can adjust the active multicon- tour seat for the driver and front passenger with COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support The 4-way lumbar support can be adjusted with COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high tempera- tures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

Seats 111

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Com- fort package: the armrest in the door and the center console can also be heated when you switch on the seat heating of one of the front seats. This can be set with COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. The distribution of the heated surfaces on the seat cushions and backrests in the front can be set via COMAND (see the separate oper- ating instructions).

Front seats

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

Rear seats

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

112 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating has switched off prema- turely or cannot be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- sumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be switched back on manually.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Front seats

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the blower setting you have selected. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 99). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Seats 113

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat ventilation has switched off prema- turely or cannot be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- sumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation can be switched back on.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 116) RStoring settings (Y page 121) ROperating the on-board computer (Y page 231).

114 Steering wheel Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow: or;. Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Steering wheel 115

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steering wheel heating has switched off prematurely or can- not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- sumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- ing adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat and the steering wheel. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by Rthe steering wheel: move the steering wheel adjustment lever. Rthe seat: press the switch for seat adjust- ment.

The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function position switches. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- ture, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driv- er's seat moves backwards if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door; the SmartKeymust be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 151) Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is switched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards and the driver's seat only moves backwards if the driving position is stored after seat or steering wheel adjustment.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored with the memory func- tion (Y page 121).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper stop.

116 Steering wheel Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

The driver's seat onlymoves backwards if it is not already in the rearmost position.

Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat for driving The steering wheel and the driver's seat are moved to the previously set position if: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the igni- tion is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

i The steering wheel and the driver's seat only return to the last set position when the driving position is stored after seat or steer- ing wheel adjustment.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored with the memory func- tion (Y page 121).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea- ture is activated in COMAND (see the sepa- rate operating instructions).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever: forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the dis- tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci- dent. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Mirrors 117

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Press button; for the right-hand exterior mirror or button= for the left-hand exte- rior mirror. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button: as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button: up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic con- ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exte- rior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Briefly press button:. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or com- pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir- rors when locking" function in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. When the Automatic Mirror Folding func- tion is activated in COMAND (see the sepa- rate operating instructions):

118 Mirrors Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- side. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position This function is only available in vehicles for Canada. If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Press and hold button: until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position (Y page 118). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 118).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti- glaremode if the following conditions aremet simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light- ing is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir- ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M ; Adjustment button = Button for the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this posi- tion.

Mirrors 119

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving posi- tion after approximately ten seconds.

Using the memory button You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M:. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.

X Press memory buttonM: and one of the arrows on adjustment button; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set- ting X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disen- gaged reverse gear Rif you press button? for the exterior mir- ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you use thememory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING When thememory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- pants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjust- ments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- diately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

120 Memory function Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Thememory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni- tion lock.

Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- ferent people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the backrest in the lumbar region Ractive multicontour seat: side bolsters of the backrest, shoulder of the backrest, con- tour of the backrest, dynamic function level Rseat heating: distribution of the heated sec- tions of the seat cushion and backrest Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir- rors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 108). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 114) and the exteriormirrors (Y page 118).

X Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected pre- set position. A tone sounds when the set- tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the corresponding storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until: RSeat RSteering wheel RExterior mirrors RHead-up display are in the stored position. i If you release the storage position button, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The multicon- tour seat setting or the 4-way lumbar sup- port is still carried out.

Memory function 121

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

122

Useful information ............................ 124 Exterior lighting ................................ 124 Interior lighting ................................. 129 Replacing bulbs ................................. 130 Windshield wipers ............................ 130

123

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Exterior lighting

General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some coun- tries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- gations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch Rthe combination switch (Y page 126) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 247)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting 4 Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0

Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times.

124 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visi- bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- time running lamps function is required by law inCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if youmove the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to T, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visi- bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 248). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected accord- ing to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather con- ditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have acti- vated the "daytime running lamps" function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to.

Low-beam headlamps Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L. The greenL indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps ! If the battery has been excessively dis- charged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT. The greenT indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina- ted. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle).

Exterior lighting 125

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow; or?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow; or?.

High-beam headlamps X To switch on manually: turn the Smart- Key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine.

X Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn the light switch to L or .

X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn the light switch to L.

X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow:. In the position, the high-beam head- lamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running.

The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To deactivate: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, it automatically controls activation and deactivation of the high-beamheadlamps (Y page 127).

High-beam flasher X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.

X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps: press button:. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corre- sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps: press button:.

126 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu- mination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better vis- ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

General notes

With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you can automatically switch between low-beam, par- tial high-beam and high-beam headlamps. Partial high-beam is a form of illumination whereby the high-beam is directed past other road users. Other road users are kept out of the high-beam. This prevents glare. When there is a vehicle in front, for example, the high-beam headlamps illuminate the areas to its right and left, and the vehicle in front is illuminated by the low-beam headlamps. The system automatically adapts the low- beam headlamp range depending on the dis- tance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- tivates the high-beam headlamps. If the high-beam or partial high-beam are causing too much reflection from traffic signs, the lights are automatically dimmed and glare for the driver caused by the reflec- tions is thus avoided. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Exterior lighting 127

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec- ognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may not recognize road users who do have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high- beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic condi- tions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visi- bility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS on/off

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left X To switch on: turn the light switch to. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow:. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- tion display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam head- lamps. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 28 mph (45 km/h) and other road users have been detected: Partial high-beam is selected automati- cally. The K indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approx- imately 25 mph (40 km/h): The partial high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. If no other road

128 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

users are recognize, the high-beam head- lamps are switched on. If you are driving at speeds below approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads are adequately illuminated: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- tion display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off

; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off

= c To switch the front interior lighting on/off

? u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off

A p To switch the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color, brightness and display lighting ,for the ambient lighting can be set using COMAND (see the separate COMAND oper- ating instructions). The interior lighting control can be operated using the front overhead control panel.

Automatic interior lighting control

: p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off

; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off

= c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

? u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

A p Switches the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off

Interior lighting 129

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

X To activate/deactivate: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting con- trol is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the igni- tion lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted using COMAND (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).

Manual interior lighting control

: p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off

; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off

= c To switch the front interior lighting on/off

? u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off

A p To switch the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off

X To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button.

or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehi- cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes placewhen the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on thewindshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the wind- shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid

130 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi- tions, the windshield wipers may be activa- ted inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity) 3 Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity) 4 Continuous wipe, slow 5 Continuous wipe, fast B Single wipe/ to wipe the wind-

shield using washer fluid X Switch on the power supply with the Start/ Stop button or the SmartKey (Y page 151).

X Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position.

In the or position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically accord- ing to the intensity of the rain. In the position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the position, causing the wind- shield wipers to wipe more frequently. The washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades; when the screen is wiped with washer fluid , the water is emitted directly from the blades.

If you push and hold the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrowB, the manual wash program is activated. If you push and hold the combina- tion switch briefly beyond the point of resist- ance in the direction of arrowB, the auto- matic wash program is activated. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic condi- tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the wind- shield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windshield. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the hood.

Windshield wipers 131

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Replacing the wiper blades

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi- tion On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Set the windshield wiper to the posi- tion.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Remove the SmartKey. X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- shield until you feel them snap into place.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Switch off the engine. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wipers to position . X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached the ver- tical position, press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until thewindshieldwipers stop.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind- shield until you feel them snap into place.

Removing a wiper blade

X To bring thewiper blade into position to be removed: hold thewiper arm firmlywith one hand. With the other hand, turn the

wiper blade in the direction of arrow: beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click.

X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob; and pull the wiper blade upwards=.

Installing the wiper blades

X Push the newwiper blade in the direction of arrow: onto the wiper arm until tab; engages.

X Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow= beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind- shield.

132 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The windshield wipers are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

Windshield wipers 133

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

134

Useful information ............................ 136 Overview of climate control sys- tems ................................................... 136 Operating the climate control sys- tems ................................................... 138 Setting the air vents ......................... 146

135

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Overview of climate control systems

General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could other- wise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi- cation function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The air filter cleans the air, thus improving the inte- rior climate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func- tion is only available when the engine is run- ning. Optimum climate control is only ach- ieved with the side windows and roof closed. If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (Y page 154). The residual heat function can only be acti- vated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 143).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the con-

venience opening feature (Y page 99). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely fil- ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol- lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the blower may be acti- vated automatically 60 minutes after the SmartKey has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside tempera- ture. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the climate control sys- tem.

136 Overview of climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Automatic climate control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 139) ; Sets the temperature, left (Y page 140) = Sets the airflow, left (Y page 141) ? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 143) A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 141) B Calls up the COMAND climate control menu (see the separate operating instructions) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 142) D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 143) E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 141) F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 140) G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 139)

Notes on using automatic climate control

Climate control system Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use climate control optimally. RActivate climate control using the rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up. RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion briefly until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the residual heat function if youwant to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deac- tivated with the ignition switched off. The residual heat function is switched off when the ignition is switched on.

Overview of climate control systems 137

Cl im at e co nt ro l

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- mate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full cli- mate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 157).

Operating the climate control sys- tems

Activating/deactivating climate con- trol

General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Switch on climate control primarily using the rocker switch (Y page 139).

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To activate: press thet rocker switch up or down. The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Activate climate control via the air-condi- tioning setting bar in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press thet rocker switch up or down. The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Deactivate climate control via the air-con- ditioning setting bar in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Switching cooling with air dehumidi- fication on/off

General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- midification" function, the air inside the vehi- cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica- tion function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func- tion is only available when the engine is run- ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc- tion.

Activating or deactivating X To activate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up.

or X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" function via COMAND (see the sep- arate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out.

or X Deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidi- fication" function via COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

138 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off. Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion can also no longer be switched on using COMAND (see the sep- arate operating instruc- tions).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the tem- perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- midification" function, the air inside the vehi- cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica- tion function only briefly.

Setting climate control to automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Set the desired temperature using the w rocker switch.

or X Set the desired temperature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X To activate: press rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up.

X To switch tomanual operation: press the K rocker switch up or down.

or X Set the airflow using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

or X Set the air distribution using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). The indicator lamp in rocker switch goes out.

In automaticmode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp on the rocker switch goes out. The func- tion which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automat- ically. When the manually set function

Operating the climate control systems 139

Cl im at e co nt ro l

switches back to automatic mode, the indi- cator lamp on the rocker switch lights up again.

Adjusting the climate mode settings In automatic mode you can select the follow- ing airflow settings for the driver's and front- passenger areas: FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and

draught-free setting X To set: set the climate mode using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the temperature

General notes

You can set the temperature separately for the following areas: Rfront footwells, left and right Rdriver and front passenger area

Setting the temperature X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To increase or reduce: press thew rocker switch up or down.

or X Set the temperature using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).

Setting the footwell temperature The footwell temperature for the driver and front passenger can be set separately using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side

air vents O Directs air through the footwell air

vents S Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting the air distribution using COMAND The air distribution for the left and right sides of the driver and front passenger area can be adjusted using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

140 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Setting the airflow

General notes You can select different airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides.

Setting the airflow X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To increase or reduce: press theK rocker switch up or down.

or X Set the airflow using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Activating or deactivating the syn- chronization function Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The settings for temperature, air distribution and airflow on the driver's side are adopted for the front- passenger side. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- tivate the synchronization function using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

The synchronization function switches off, if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed.

Defrosting the windshield You can use this function to defrost the wind- shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion as soon as the windshield is clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To switch on: press the rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up.

The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rwindshield heating on

X To deactivate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

or X Press the rocker switch up or down. or X Use thet rocker switch to call up the COMAND climate control menu.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" function with the rocker switch.

or X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" function via COMAND (see the sep- arate operating instructions).

X Switch on automatic mode using the rocker switch.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the rocker switch. The windshield heating is switched on. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Operating the climate control systems 141

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Switch on automatic mode using the rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off auto- matically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win- dow defroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up or goes out.

142 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear window defroster has deactiva- ted prematurely or can- not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recir- culated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- lation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To activate: press theg rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in theg rocker switch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti- vated at high levels of pollution or at high out- side temperatures. The indicator lamp in the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press theg rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in theg rocker switch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati- cally: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 (5 ) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 (5 ) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notes Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time depends on the temperature that has been set.

Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock or remove it (Y page 151).

X To activate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in rocker switch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.

Operating the climate control systems 143

Cl im at e co nt ro l

If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNING If children open the perfume vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into con- tactwith their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficul- ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental note Full perfume vials must not be disposed of with house- hold rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the envi- ronment.

Dispose of full perfume vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a special waste collection point.

: Perfume lid ; Perfume vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driv- ing comfort. Using COMAND, you can: Rswitch the perfume atomizer on or off Rregulate the perfume intensity (see the sep- arate operating instructions)

The following conditions can affect your per- ception of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the climate control sys- tem Rinterior temperature Rtime of year or day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fatigue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operated when the climate control system is switched on and is only active when the glove box is closed. The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre- filled perfume vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe themanufactur- ers' safety notices on the perfume packag- ing.

144 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. X To insert the perfumevial: open the glove box (Y page 301).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it your- self.

X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the desired liquid perfume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, youmight not ach- ieve optimum results from the perfume atom- izer.

Operating the climate control systems 145

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Z

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The vehicle interior is not perfumed although the perfume atomizer is activated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will go. X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial has not been adequately filled. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the same perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty. X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ionization You can use the "Ionization" function to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate. The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehi- cle interior. You can switch ionization on or off using COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). Ionization can only be switched on if the front climate control system is activated. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

: Fixed center air vent ; Center air vent, right

146 Setting the air vents Cl im at e co nt ro l

= Center vent control, right ? Center vent control, left A Center air vent, left X To open/close: press control= or?. The control pops out.

X Turn control= or? counter-clockwise or clockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent; orA by themiddle fin andmove up or down or to the left or right.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent = Control for left side air vent X To open/close: press control=. The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise or clockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent; by the middle fin and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Setting the glove box air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- cle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "coolingwith air dehu- midification" function. Otherwise, temper- ature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged.

When the climate control system is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings.

: Air vent control ; Air vent X To open or close: turn control: to the right or left.

Setting the rear-compartment air vents

X To open/close: press control=. The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise or clockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent: or; by themiddle fin andmove up or down or to the left or right.

Setting the air vents 147

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Z

148

Useful information ............................ 150 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- cle ....................................................... 150 Driving ............................................... 150 Automatic transmission ................... 159 Refueling ............................................ 167 Parking ............................................... 170 Driving tips ........................................ 174 Driving systems ................................ 179

149

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driv- ing safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in proce- dure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after sev- eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- cle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- tle, during this period. RWhen shifting gears manually, upshift in good time, before the tachometer needle reaches of the way to the red area of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- down). RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in drive program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes- AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km), drive in program C.

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

150 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi- cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throt- tle until the engine has reached its operat- ing temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 (+20 ), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the

engine and maintain smooth engine oper- ation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position 3 To start the engine The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notes All vehicles are equipped with a removable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approx- imately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only

Driving 151

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- ately. A checkwhich periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83).

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the Smart- Key. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but- ton on the front door (Y page 89), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/ Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehi- cle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off func- tion.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 287). If Start/Stop button: has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button: once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button: twice. The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if: Ryou do not start the engine within 15 minutes when in this position Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position.

The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position

152 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- mal using the SmartKey. It is only possible to switch between Start/ Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P. X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignition lock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi- cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine.

General notes During a cold start, the engine runs at higher speeds to enable the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 159). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 161).

You can start the engine in transmission posi- tion P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- tion lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 151).

Driving 153

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop auto- matic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 151). The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphone Observe the important safety notes on start- ing the engine (Y page 153). You can also start your engine via your smart- phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control set- ting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the journey. Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain coun- tries or regions. You can execute a maximum of two consec- utive starting attempts via your smartphone. Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time.

You can only start the engine via your smart- phone if: Rthe SmartKey or the Start/Stop button is not inserted in the ignition lock Rpark position P is selected Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated Rthe panic alarm is deactivated Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off Rthe hood is closed. Rthe doors are closed and locked Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed Also make sure that: Rthe fuel tank is filled sufficiently Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNING Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during ser- vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury. Always secure the engine against uninten- tional starting before carrying out mainte- nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for exam- ple, if you: Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps Rdo not lock the doors Ropen the hood

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

154 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pull- ing away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 90). It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 172).

Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- ped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display

Driving 155

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automat- ically by the ECO start/stop function, the ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc- tion display. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- ature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles): automatic engine switch-off can take

place amaximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimited.

Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou switch to drive program S or M Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- shield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

156 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. If drive programS orM has been selected, the ECO start/stop function is always deactiva- ted. If you switch on the ECO start/stop function while drive program S is selected, the drive program automatically switches to E.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive program C, press ECO button:.

or X Switch to drive program S or M (Y page 163). Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive program S or M is active, the auto- matic transmission switches to drive pro- gram C.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. If drive programS orM has been selected, the ECO start/stop function is always deactiva- ted. If you switch on the ECO start/stop function while drive program S is selected, the drive program automatically switches to C.

Driving 157

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 153). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 351). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run- ning smoothly and is misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con- verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The coolant tempera- ture gauge shows a value above 248 (120 ).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 328). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

158 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission

position P, R, N or D appears in the transmis- sion position display (Y page 161) in the mul- tifunction display.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi- cle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly fromD toR, fromR to D or directly to P. The automatic transmis- sion could otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- tion of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart- Key and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart- Key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehi- cle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmis- sion position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function

Automatic transmission 159

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

(Y page 193) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toR when the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further infor- mation on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 155).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

If you switch the engine off with the trans- mission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automati- cally. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwith a towing system: Using the SmartKey: X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button: X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal.

160 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position D X If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position display

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program The arrows in the transmission position dis- play show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in themul- tifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission posi- tion D and drive program E or S.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position ; Drive program The arrows in the transmission position dis- play show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in themul- tifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission posi- tion D and drive program C or S.

Automatic transmission 161

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Transmission positions

B Park position Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is sta- tionary (Y page 170). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addi- tion to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. If the vehicle electronics are mal- functioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the auto- matic transmission could be dam- aged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to positionN if the vehicle is in danger of skid- ding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damage the drive train.

7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the indi- vidual gears automatically when it is in trans- mission position D. This automatic gear shift- ing behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 163) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 162) Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the auto- matic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positionsD andR can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management restricts switching between transmission positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission posi- tionsD and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance.

162 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Program selector button

X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): press program selector but- ton: to change the drive program. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press program selector button: repeatedly until the let- ter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display.

The program selector button influences: Rthe drive program (Y page 164) Rthe engine management On Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E is called drive program C. The automatic transmission switches to auto- matic drive program E (drive program C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

E Economy Comfortable, economical driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

You can also activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 164). In manual drive program M, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. Mercedes-AMG vehicles

C Controlled Efficiency

Comfortable, economical driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Permanent drive program M is only available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 165). You can also activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 164). In manual drive program M, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 164).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

Automatic transmission 163

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

You can activate manual drive program M in the E (C in AMG vehicles) and S automatic drive programs using steering wheel paddle shifters: and; (Y page 164). In manual drive programM, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: you can also acti- vate manual drive program M with the pro- gram selector button (Y page 165). In man- ual drive program M, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program E Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin.

Automatic drive program S Drive program S is characterized by the fol- lowing: Rsporty engine settings. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.

Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmis- sion shift points.

Manual drive program M

General notes In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad- dle shifters. The transmissionmust be in posi- tion D. You can activate manual drive program M in the E (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) and S automatic drive programs. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: as well as tempo- rary drive program M, you can also activate permanent drive program M. Further infor- mation about permanent drive program M (Y page 165).

Activating X Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163). Manual drive programM is temporarily acti- vated. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:) M and the selected gear appear in the multifunction display.

Shifting gears If you pull on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans- mission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If the maximum engine speed on the cur- rently engaged gear is reached and you

164 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission will not shift up to the next gear when the engine speed is very low.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The rec- ommended gear is shown in themultifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear; according to gearshift recommendation: when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Deactivating If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain.

If manual drive program M has been deacti- vated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected. You can also deactivate manual drive pro- gram M yourself: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad- dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 163).

or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position.

or X Use the program selector button to change the drive program (Y page 163). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches to the previously activated drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) or S.

Manual drive program (Mercedes- AMG vehicles)

General information In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and smoothness of gear changes. As well as this permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive pro- gram M (Y page 164).

Switching on the manual drive program In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. You can see the currently selected drive program and which gear is engaged in the multifunction display.

Automatic transmission 165

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

X Press the program selector button (Y page 163) repeatedly untilM appears in the multifunction display.

Upshifting

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatic transmission does not shift up automati- cally even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul- tifunction display. X When message; appears in the multi- function display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

Downshifting X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear if this is permissible.

Maximum acceleration X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear according to the speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automati- cally shifts down.

Switching off themanual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 163) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display.

166 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission has problems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately.

The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no longer changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately.

Transfer case ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test.

! To prevent ESP from intervening, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam- aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans- mitted to both axles.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 167

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- fied specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 401).

Refueling

General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 167). If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the out- side, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-

eled X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

168 Refueling Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow:. The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap. If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel filler flap open message is shown in the multifunction display.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multi- function display (Y page 271). In addition, the;Check Enginewarning lamp may light up (Y page 293). For further information onwarning and indi- cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 293).

Refueling 169

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.

G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can- not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 83).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 85).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam- med. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- cle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

170 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- ents. Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Further information if the engine cannot be switched off as described here (Y page 359).

Using the SmartKey X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated.

If you switch the engine off with the trans- mission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the Smart- Key from the ignition, the automatic trans- mission shifts to P automatically.

If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwith a towing system: X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

Using the Start/Stop button X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 151) The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this cor- responds to key position 1. When the driv- er's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the trans- mission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open the driver's or front- passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwith a towing system: X Switch on the ignition. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Parking 171

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emer- gency while the vehicle is in motion by press- ing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates inde- pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion P.

It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a func- tion test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:. When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ter goes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button

172 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle:. The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary

In addition, at least one of the following con- ditions must be fulfilled: Rthere is a system malfunction. Rthe power supply is insufficient. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automati- cally engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released auto- matically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position D or R. Rthe seat belt has been fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the automatic transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi- tion P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler- ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.

Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle:of the electric parking brake (Y page 172). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle: of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer electric parking brake handle: is depressed, the greater the braking force.

During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Please Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging.

Parking 173

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work- shop.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun- try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-freemode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.

Drive sensibly save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not nee- ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv- ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.

174 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the enginemust be carried out by qualified and authorized Mercedes- Benz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selec- ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAccel. RConstant RCoasting The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and themean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percent- age indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption.

Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: Rload Rtire pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO dis- play. The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories: RAccel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro- cesses) - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at all times) - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes) - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. To achieve a higher value in the categories Accel. and Constant, Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving char- acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes.

Driving tips 175

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

For more dynamic changes, carry out a man- ual reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 236).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes. When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur- face. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the air- flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, theremay be a delayed reac- tion from the brakeswhen braking for the first time. Thismay also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- tion to the traffic conditions. Thiswill warmup the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corro- sion.

Limited braking performance on salt- treated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying atten- tion to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear awarn- ing tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe

176 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

additional warning messages in the multi- function display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immedi- ately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to oper- ate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center in advance. You could other- wise damage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicleswith 4MATIC: the ESP system operates automatically. The engine and the ignitionmust therefore be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP system operates automatically. The engine and the ignitionmust therefore be switched off (the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is tested using a brake dynamometer. Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised. Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the function- ality of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 68) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 69). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends only installing the following brake disks and brake pads/linings: Rbrake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake pads/linings when replacing brake disks. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched. The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the trackwidth and is subject to approval, if appli- cable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake disks, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock- type loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Driving tips 177

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes The high-performance brake system is only available on Mercedes-AMG vehicles. The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking force REnvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- ing style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circum- stances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further informa- tion about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after sev- eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in corre- spondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed. Ravoid ruts. Ravoid sudden steering movements. Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of anywater before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic compo- nents in the engine or the automatic trans- mission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

178 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- ter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are dis- played after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freez- ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 365). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 364). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 364).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety sys- tems which enhance comfort and support the

driver in critical situations. With these intelli- gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 67).

Cruise control

General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially impor- tant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from over- heating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

Driving systems 179

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drivewheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed ; To activate or reduce speed = To deactivate cruise control ? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In the speedometer, the seg- ments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the current speed

You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

Calling up the last speed stored

G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

180 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up: for a higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel- erate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press cruise the control lever for- wards: .

or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con trol Off message in the multifunction dis- play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

Driving systems 181

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the dis- tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi- cles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- cially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- vent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and 2. This devicemust accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- tify other road users and complex traffic sit- uations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident.

182 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drivewheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi- cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect- edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed ; To activate or reduce speed = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS ? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance

Driving systems 183

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol- lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activa- ted. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you;, up: or down= . DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: to the

pressure point for a higher speed, or down = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

or X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down= for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.

i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemes- sage appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. Youwill be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you; or press it up: or down=. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

184 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you:.

or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no

vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehi- cle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive program All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you select the S drive program (Y page 163). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style when you select the S or M drive program (Y page 163). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. When you select the C drive program, the vehicle accel- erates more gently. This setting is recom- mended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision

Driving systems 185

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand- drive vehicles or the right lane on right- hand-drive vehicles.

Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 188). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in

front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to posi- tion P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for a higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly

186 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

press the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished over- taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds.With this func- tion, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 187).

i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direc- tion:. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, trian- gle; shows the stored speed. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments between the speed of the vehicle in front: and stored speed; light up. The segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

Driving systems 187

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the on-board computer, you can select the assis- tance graphics display. X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 243).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected = Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the on-board computer, you can select the assis- tance graphics display. X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 243).

You will see the stored speed for about five secondswhen you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- wards:

or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva- ted if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front- passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle has skidded Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-

188 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

function display for approximately five sec- onds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles traveling on a different line ROther vehicles changing lanes RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi- cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi- cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short.

Driving systems 189

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions at speeds of 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system: at the top of the windshield. At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) Steering Assist focuses on detected lane markings (left and right), and only on the vehi- cle in front if lane markings are missing. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro- vide any support if these conditions do not exist. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available.

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for

190 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf- fic conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lanemarking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi- cle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The support provided by the system can be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- struction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lanemarkings thus cannot be detected

Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road The system is switched to passive and no lon- ger assists you by performing steering inter- ventions if: Ryou actively change lane Ryou switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steeringwheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time

i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated again automatically after a lane change is completed.

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro- vide any support: Ron very sharp corners Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 182). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel sym- bol appears in themultifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. SteeringAssist andStop&GoPilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Driving systems 191

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

X Press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+: Steering Assist. On message appears in themultifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti- vated but not ready for a steering interven- tion, steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, sym- bol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

X Press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+: Steering Assist. Offmessage appears in themultifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

192 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Further information on deactivating theHOLD function (Y page 193).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions are met.

X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until: appears in the multifunction dis- play. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automati- cally if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until dis- appears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The HOLD function is then deacti- vated.

When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to posi- tion P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activa- ted when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Driving systems 193

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

If a malfunction in the electric parking brake occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically.

MAGIC BODY CONTROL

General notes MAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of Active Body Control (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN, the CURVE cornering function as well as auto- matic vehicle stabilization in the event of a crosswind. Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce fuel consumption. The sus- pension mode is adjusted according to your selection (SPORT, COMFORT or CURVE), the road surface conditions and the vehicle load. A multifunction camera detects bumps in the road surface before the vehicle drives over them. This reduces chassis movements.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

! The vehicle is lowered when the engine is switched off. When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

Crosswind Assist The crosswind stabilization operates by changing wheel loads through distortion of the ABC spring struts. It reduces impairments in handling when driving in a straight line and assists during countersteering.

Crosswind Assist is active in the speed range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 130 mph (210 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Active Body Control ABC

Vehicle level All vehicles except AMG vehicles: depend- ing on the vehicle level that has been set, the vehicle automatically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.6 in (15 mm) as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height. In the event of poor road surface conditions, the vehicle automatically raises by up to0.4 in (10 mm) and harder damping is selected. AMG vehicles: depending on the vehicle level that has been selected, the vehicle auto- matically adjusts its height dependent on the current speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.4 in (10 mm) below the normal level as the speed increases. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road conditions and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or in particularly poor road conditions. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rare driving faster than approximately 75 mph (120 km/h). Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h).

194 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

While driving, the raised level can only be selected at speeds of under 75 mph (120 km/h). Setting the raised vehicle level X Start the engine. X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level.

Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. X If indicator lamp; is lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning The electro-hydraulically controlled ABC sus- pension system works continuously. This improves driving safety and comfort. The sys- tem detects the vehicle level and the vehicle load and adjusts the setting accordingly. You can also choose between a particularly sporty mode (SPORT), a comfortable mode (COM- FORT), as well as a comfortable mode with cornering function (CURVE). The ABC suspension system is tuned individ- ually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sporty or com- fort or comfort with the CURVE dynamic cornering function

Rthe vehicle load Rthe force of the side wind Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

The firmer suspension setting in SPORTmode ensures even better contact with the road. The steering response behavior is sporty. Select this mode on winding country roads or highways, for example. Selecting the sports suspension tuning X When indicator lamp; is off: press but- ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp; is on. You have selected the suspension for a sporty driving style. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the Active Body Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. AMGvehicles: the AMG Suspension Sys tem SPORT message appears in the multi- function display.

In COMFORT mode, the driving characteris- tics of your vehicle are especially comforta-

Driving systems 195

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

ble. The steering response behavior is bal- anced. Select this mode if you favor a com- fortable driving style. Selecting the standard comfort mode sus- pension tuning X When indicator lamp; is off: press but- ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp; is on. Indicator lamp; lights up. You have selec- ted the suspension for a comfortable driv- ing style. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the Active Body Control COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunction display. AMGvehicles: the AMG Suspension Sys tem COMFORTmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display.

In the CURVE driving mode, the vehicle tilts actively when cornering. The tilt function and the comfort suspension tuning increase driv- ing comfort in corners. CURVE is available in the speed range between 18 mph (30 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). Select this mode on winding roads in particular. Outside of this speed range, the CURVE driving mode corre- sponds to the comfort mode. Selecting CURVE driving mode X Press button: repeatedly until both indi- cator lamps; and= light up. CURVE driving mode is selected. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: CURVE driving mode is selected. The Active Body Control CURVE message appears in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles: the AMG Ride Control CURVE message appears in the multifunc- tion display.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN

i This function is not available in all coun- tries. If you have selected the CURVE driving mode, the ROAD SURFACE SCAN function is available up to speeds of 60 km/h.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of the vehicle using multi- function camera: at the top of the wind- shield. This function is automatically active if you select comfort suspension tuning. The system is operational at speeds of up to 81 mph (130 km/h). This function allows bumps in the road sur- face to be detected before the vehicle drives over them. The spring struts are then actu- ated, with the result that chassis movements are significantly reduced when driving over bumps. The system is deactivated when you select the raised vehicle level, sports mode or the dynamic cornering function. The systemmay be impaired or may not func- tion if: Rthe road surface is insufficiently lit Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic

196 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov- ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe road surface has no texture or is reflec- tive, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt, concrete slabs or puddles Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short Rsections of the route have a very small radius of curvature Ryou accelerate hard or brake sharply

AIRMATIC

General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. All- round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con- sumption. There is also the option tomanually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and the Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Nor- mal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selec- tion remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit: X Press button:. Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Rising message appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten sec- onds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75mph (120 km/h) Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h)

Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is lit: X Press button:. Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level.

Driving systems 197

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Suspension tuning

General notes The Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com- fort

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

i You can choose between the sporty and comfortablemode.One of the twomodes is always active.

Sports tuning

The firmer suspension tuning in sport mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen- sion tuning is selected. The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.

AMG vehicles: X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by another 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal level in sport mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORTmes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. There- fore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode alsowhen driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but- ton:. Indicator lamp; lights up. Comfort tuning is selected. All vehicles except AMG vehicles: the AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. AMGvehicles: the AMG Suspension Sys tem COMFORTmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display.

Load compensation The vehicle can compensate differences in the vehicle level by raising or lowering the axles.

198 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- manently driven. Together with ESP, it improves the traction of your vehicle when- ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic con- ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheelsmust remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace- ment for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for

safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park- ing space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensorsmay not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONICmay not function correctly on uneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors

General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- sideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang- ing loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

Driving systems 199

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function cor- rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 335).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warn- ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle

= Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehi- cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg- ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if opera- tional readiness indicator= lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

200 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

minewhichwarning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle is rolling back- wards

Rear and front areas activated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approx- imately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two sec- onds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 201

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 335). X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exit- ing a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 199).

Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park- ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces

202 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or over- grown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 200) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehi- cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.

G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these objects

You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detection range (Y page 199). Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direc- tion of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou park forwards Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta- cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Driving systems 203

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

: Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automat- ically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front- passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-

er's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing thea button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approx- imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are respon- sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: %message appears in themultifunction display.

204 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press thea button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times.When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can- celed. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight park- ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmes- sage appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by wait- ing for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill.

The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is com- plete, the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display and a

warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake appli- cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin- ished, you must steer and brake again your- self. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the posi- tion and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should can- cel the parking procedure with Active Park- ing Assist. RYou can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can sup- port you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking spacemust not be toowide, as the position of the vehiclemust not exceed an angle of 45 to the starting position as it is maneuvering into the park- ing space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available.

Driving systems 205

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: message appears in the multifunction dis- play%.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press thea button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit- ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park- ing Assist will be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R as required or according to themessage while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by wait- ing for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com- pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering, before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking Assist X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled mes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

or X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 201). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati- cally if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than6mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP intervenes or fails. The

warning lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display

206 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

shows the Park Assist Canceled mes- sage. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is under a flap in the trunk lid. Rear view camera: is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the COMAND display.

Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your imme- diate surroundings. You are always responsi- ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehi- cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). The guide lines in the COMAND display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level.

i The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 336). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.

Driving systems 207

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Activating/deactivating the rear view camera X To activate:make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND (see separate operating instructions).

X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti- vates if you shift the transmission toP or after driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the COMAND display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the badge in the trunk lid

! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bot- tom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer- ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans- mission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

208 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

: Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), an additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMAND display;. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays: and= are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on . The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care- fully back up until you reach the end posi- tion. Red guide line? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost paral- lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on . The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the park-

Driving systems 209

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

ing space until yellow guide line; reaches parking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. Thewhite lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possi- ble.

: White guide line at current steering wheel angle

; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center posi- tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel

= End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line: is then at end of parking space=. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

180 view

: Symbol for the 180 view function ; PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the rear view camera to select a 180 view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays; light up in the COMAND display in yellow or red respectively.

210 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Object detection The rear view camera can detect moving and stationary objects. If, for example, a pedes- trian or another vehicle is detected, these objects are marked with bars. The system is only able to detect and mark stationary objects when your vehicle is moving. When the vehicle is stationary, moving objects can be detected and marked. In order to use the function, it must be switched on in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

360 camera (surround view)

General notes The 360 camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system analyzes images from the follow- ing cameras: RRear view camera RFront camera RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras capture the immediate sur- roundings of the vehicle. The 360 camera assists you, for instance when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. The 360 camera images can be shown in full screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the COMAND display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130 viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130 viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view

Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and images from the forward- facing side cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift the transmission fromD or R toN, the guide lines in the COMAND display are hidden. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack- ets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brack- ets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode

The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object. Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehi- cle Rred line: an object is present in the imme- diate close range of the vehicle

Important safety notes The 360camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneu- vering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surround- ings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.

Driving systems 211

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The 360 camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driv- ing into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 336) Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360 camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. The guide lines in the COMAND display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level.

i The camera in the rear area is protected from raindrops and dust bymeans of a flap. This flap opens when the 360 camera is activated. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 336). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360 camera has been deactivated.

On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in: Rinaccuracies in the guide lines Rinaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view)

Activation conditions The 360 camera image can be displayed if: RCOMAND is switched on (see the separate operating instructions) Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on i If the 360 camera is activated at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Rthe vehicle's speed falls below approx- imately 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360 camera is then activated. Rthe message is confirmed with the% button.

Switching the 360 camera on and off using the button

X To switch on: press button:. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Rfull screen display with the image from the rear view camera

X To switch off: press button: again.

212 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Activating the 360 camera with COMAND X Press the button in the center con- sole. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select the 360 camera: turn and press the controller. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera

Further information on the COMAND control- ler can be found in the separate operating instructions.

Activating the 360 camera using reverse gear The 360 camera images can be automati- cally displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND (see separate operating instructions).

X To show the360 camera image: engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display in split-screenmode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays Switching between split screen views: X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide Z V the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.

Switching to full screen mode: X 180 View Turn and press the controller.

i The 180 option is only available in the following views: RTop view with picture from the rear view camera RTop viewwith picture from the front cam- era

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notes The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the vari- ous cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bot- tom-most guideline.

Driving systems 213

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Top view with picture from the rear view camera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image

= Guide line for themaximumsteering angle ? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-

ing wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans- mission is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam- era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer- ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 12 in (0.30m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

214 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the dis- tance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam- eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward- facing side camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (right side of vehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)

i You can also select the side camera set- ting for the rear-facing view.

180 view

: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rear view camera image

; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180 view can also be selected as front view.

Select this viewwhen you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restric- ted, for example.

Exiting 360 camera display mode The 360 camera display is stopped Rwhen you select transmission positionP, or Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds The view which was active before the 360 camera was displayed appears in the COMAND display. You can also stop the 360 camera display split-screen view by selecting the% symbol in the display and then con- firming with the COMAND controller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN- TIONASSIST detects typical indicators of fati- gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.

Driving systems 215

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur- face is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assess- ment is deleted and restarted when continu- ing the journey, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis- played in the assistance menu (Y page 244) of the on-board computer. X Select the Assistance display for ATTEN- TION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 243).

The following information is displayed: Rlength of the journey since the last break. Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN- TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Passive message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37mph (60 km/h) or above 124mph (200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- board computer (Y page 246). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Atten- tion Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier.

216 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva- ted, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra- tion are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a Break! In addition to the message shown in the mul- tifunction display, you will then hear a warn- ing tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing thea button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in con- centration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap- pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is output in the multifunction dis- play, COMAND performs a service station search. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instru- ment cluster. The data and general traffic reg- ulations stored in the navigation system are used to determine the current speed limit.

As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits is updated. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown. The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun- tries. In this case, symbol: is shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 243).

Important safety notes Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date.

Driving systems 217

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Activating Traffic Sign Assist X Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display using the on-board computer (Y page 245).

If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist display in the on-board computer, the traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions) are displayed in the instrument cluster for five seconds respectively. The wrong-way warning and the traffic sign dis- play for speed limits and overtaking restric- tions remain active evenwhen the display has been deactivated.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphic X Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer (Y page 243).

X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles

for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant

= Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply.

Speed limits in wet conditions

: Maximum permitted speed ; Additional signs for wet conditions A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) applies in wet conditions and if Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the restriction must be observed.

Canceling the speed limit

The speed limit no longer applies:.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h ormph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum permitted speed.

218 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night ViewAssist Plus camera;picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in the multifunction display. The image shown in the display corresponds to a road lit up by high-beamheadlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedestrian recognition is active, pedestrians recognized by the system are visually highlighted in color in the Night View Assist Plus display with small frame cor- ners. In addition, an infrared camera is integrated into the radiator trim:. The camera helps detect pedestrians and animals. Observe the notes on cleaning the infrared camera (Y page 337).

i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traf- fic.

Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Drive carefully and always adapt

your driving style to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. The systemmay be impaired or may not func- tion if: Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rif the windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov- ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rif the thermal imaging camera in the radia- tor grill is dirty, fogged up or covered Ron bends, hilltops or downhill gradients Rat high outside temperatures Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects directly in front of or beside the vehicle. It may be the case that other objects are marked or highlighted as well as pedestrians and animals.

Pedestrian and animal recognition

General notes Pedestrian or animal recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians or animals are partially or entirely obscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehicles Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of the animal in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by pow- erful light reflections Rpedestrians or animals do not contrast with the surroundings Rthe camera system no longer recognizes pedestrians as persons due to special clothing or other objects Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Ranimals are not recognized by the system, e.g. because of their size or shape

Pedestrian and animal recognition is deacti- vated at temperatures above 90 (32). The spotlight function and automatic delayed switch-off are then no longer active.

Driving systems 219

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display ; Readiness symbol for active pedestrian

recognition = Highlighting ? Pedestrian recognized Night View Assist Plus can recognize pedes- trians using typical characteristics, e.g. the body contours and posture of a person stand- ing upright. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated. Ryou are driving faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Rit is dark. If pedestrian recognition is active, readiness symbol; appears. Persons who are detec- ted are highlighted by framing=. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by looking at a screen.

Animal recognition Animals can be recognized in the following situations: Rdarkness Routside built-up areas Rbelow an outside temperature of 90 (32)

Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger animals such as deer, cows or horses using typical characteristics. The system does not detect: Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and cats Ranimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec- ognizable

When detected, animals are marked with small color frame corners. In contrast to pedestrian recognition, there is no separate readiness symbol in the multifunction dis- play.

Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus

Activation conditions You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 151) or the engine has been started. Rthe light switch is in the or L posi- tion. Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating Night View Assist Plus

X Press button:. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the multifunction display.

i The infrared headlamps only switch on in the dark from speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do not have the full visual range while the vehi- cle is stationary and cannot check whether

220 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Night View Assist Plus is working. The infra- red headlamps are deactivated at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h). The Night View image continues to be displayed until you deactivate it by pressing button:.

Automatic activation You can select the Night View Assist Automatic Activation option via the Night View Assist menu. The pedestrian and animal search function remains active evenwhen the Night View image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds of more than 60 km/h, the Night View image is auto- matically displayed in the multifunction dis- play as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected. X In the assistance menu, select automatic delayed switch-off of Night ViewAssist Plus (Y page 244).

Deactivating Night View Assist Plus X Press button:. The Night View Assist Plus display disap- pears from the multifunction display. Night View Assist is deactivated.

Spotlight function

General notes Under certain conditions, the spotlight func- tion uses the headlamps to flash at detected pedestrians. The spotlight function is only active if: Rpedestrian recognition is active Rthe road surface is not lit Rthe driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h) Rthe "Adaptive HighbeamAssist PLUS" func- tion is activated (Y page 128)

The spotlight function is not active or is active only to a limited extent if: Ryou are driving in city traffic Rthere are pedestrians located in the area of an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front

Activating the spotlight function The pedestrian detection with spotlight func- tion is running the background. If the prereq- uisites are met, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestrian detected on or near to the road surface. X In the light menu, select the spotlight func- tion of Night View Assist (Y page 247).

The spotlight function does not flash at ani- mals.

Display in the assistance graphic

Pedestrian symbol: in the assistance graphic indicates the status of the spotlight function. If the symbol is displayed not filled in, the function is switched on. If the symbol is displayed filled in, the conditions for the spot- light function are met. Displaying the assistance graphic X Select the Assistance Graphicmenu on the on-board computer (Y page 243).

Driving systems 221

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside. X Fold down camera cover (Y page 337). X Defrost the windshield (Y page 141).

The windshield is iced up. X De-ice the windshield (Y page 141).

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield. X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 131).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash. X Clean the windshield (Y page 335).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windshield.

The pedestrian and ani- mal recognition is not available.

The infrared camera in the radiator grill is dirty. X Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notes The Driving Assistance PLUS package con- sists of DISTRONICPLUS (Ypage182), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 222) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 225).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehi- cle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the cor- responding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-

ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu- ates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are pointed in the direction of travel. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

222 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- uations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions care- fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and 2. This devicemust accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth- erwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient dis- tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy- cles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in themiddle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane.

Driving systems 223

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning display

: Warning display Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre- sponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- matically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flash- ing of red warning lamp:. There are no fur- ther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you ormakes a course-correcting brake appli- cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

224 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display; underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course- correcting brake application may be interrup- ted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a course- correcting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehi- cle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or PRE-SAFE Brake. RESP is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 246).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multi- function camera: at the top of the wind- shield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also moni- tored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-cor- recting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in a speed range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of phys- ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu- ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.

Driving systems 225

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func- tion if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bump- ers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- struction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lanemarkings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lanemarking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steer- ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when nec- essary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain con- ditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high- way. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circum- stances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- cation.

G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the systemmaymake an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv- ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure that

226 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display: appears in the multifunction dis- play. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking rec- ognized as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of inter- mittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detec- ted in the adjacent lane. The following vehi- cles can have an influence on brake applica- tion: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are over- taking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inap- propriate brake application may be interrup- ted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction Rswitch on the turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is inter- rupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering intervention may be made. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display

Driving systems 227

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

(Y page 243) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

X To switch off: press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting X In the DriveAssistmenu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keep ing Assist function (Y page 246).

X Select Standard or Adaptive. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when nec- essary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain con- ditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high- way. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

228 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Useful information ............................ 230 Important safety notes ..................... 230 Displays and operation ..................... 230 Menus and submenus ...................... 235 Display messages ............................. 251 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 285

229

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra nd

di sp la ys

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and consult a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The

operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board computer only showsmessages or warnings from certain systems in the mul- tifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle inte- rior can be adjusted using the brightness con- trol knob. The brightness control is located between the instrument cluster and the COMAND Display (Y page 35). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If the light switch (Y page 126) is set to , T or L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.

Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

230 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra nd

di sp la ys

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in themul- tifunction display (Y page 232). There is a short delay before a change in out- side temperature is shown in the multifunc- tion display.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is above 257 (125 ) do not drive any further. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower section of the tachometer (Y page 33). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant tem- perature may rise to 255 (124 ).

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel

ROpens the menu list

9

:

Press briefly: RScrolls in lists RSelects a menu or function RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects a station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number

Displays and operation 231

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

9

:

Press and hold: RScrolls rapidly through all lists RIn the Radio or Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open

a RIn all menus: confirms the selec- ted entry in the list RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources or media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected num- ber

RSwitches off the Voice Control System (see the separate oper- ating instructions)

% Press briefly: RBack RIn the Radio or Media menu: deselects the track or station list or list of available radio sources or media RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory

% Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits the telephone book/redial memory

6 RMakes or accepts a call RSwitches to the redial memory

W X

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

RSwitches on the Voice Control System (see the separate oper- ating instructions)

Multifunction display

: Top status bar ; Display = Bottom status bar Display panel; shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. X To open the menu list: press the button on the steering wheel. Display panel; appears in the menu list.

Possible top status bar displays: - - Outside temperature (Y page 231) # Turn signal, left (Y page 126) L Low-beam headlamps (Y page 125) K High-beam headlamps (Y page 126) T Parking lamps and license plate lamps

(Y page 125) ! Turn signal, right (Y page 126) Possible bottom status bar displays: ECO start/stop function

(Y page 155) HOLD function (Y page 192) j Active Parking Assist (Y page 202)

232 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (Y page 127)

a DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 190)

--- km/h

Additional speedometer (Y page 248)

Head-up display

General notes The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RTraffic Sign Assist RNavigation The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without having to take his eyes off the road.

Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are not always correctly displayed. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The visibility of the head-up display is influ- enced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position Rthe positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light Rsunglasses with polarization filters Rwet roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the dis- play cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again.

i Vehicles with the head-up display are equipped with a special windshield. Should repairs be necessary, have the windshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on or off

X Press button:. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision.

Displays and operation 233

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Standard displays in the head-up display

The head-up display shows the following contents and information: : Navigation messages ; Current speed = Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 182)

Cruise control set speed (Y page 179) ? Detected traffic signs

AMG displays in the head-up display AMG displays are available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

The head-up display shows the following contents and information: : Current engine speed ; Current speed

234 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

= Upshift indicator ? Currently selected gear, gearshift options when shifting manually

Setting options You can make the following settings in the head-up display submenu: Radjust the position of the head-up display on the windshield (Y page 247) Radjust the brightness of the displays in the head-up display (Y page 247) Rselect desired displays in the head-up dis- play (Y page 246) Using the Display Content function, you can, depending on your vehicle's equip- ment, choose between four standard dis- plays. The selected contents then appear in the head-up display. In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-specific contents. If you select a display with traffic signs, detected traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the head-up display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overview Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 231). Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 235) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 237) RRadio menu (Y page 239) RMedia menu (Y page 240) RTelephone menu (Y page 241) RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 243) RService menu (Y page 243)

RSettings menu (Y page 244) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 249)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer: and odometer; appears.

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis- plays approximate range:. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

Menus and submenus 235

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the display with approximate range: and cur- rent fuel consumption;.

Approximate range: that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledC appears instead of approximate range:. Recuperation display= shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display= depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles.

ECO display

The ECO display is not available in Mercedes- AMG vehicles. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select ECO Display.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- matically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 175).

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"

: Distance ; Driving time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Select From Start or From Reset with: or9.

The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 237). In the following cases the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset.

236 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Digital speedometer

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the digital speedometer.

Resetting values

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the function that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: to select Yes and confirm with a.

You can reset the values of the following func- tions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find further information on navigation instructions in the separate operating instructions. X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel ; Current road

Menus and submenus 237

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination ; Estimated arrival time = Distance to the next change of direction ? Current road

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to the change of direction = Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane not recommended (dark gray) A Possible lane (light gray) B Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white) On multilane roads, new lane recommenda- tions can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added.

Lane not recommended?: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible laneA: you will be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane only. Recommended laneB: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direc- tion and the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom- mendation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to bemade, you will see symbol= for the change of direction and distance graphic;. The distance indi- cator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.

238 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Change of direction with lane recommen- dation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga- tion system

: Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew Route... orCalculating Route... A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route

No route could be calculated to the selec- ted destination. RO

You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency range ; Station frequency with memory position = Name of artist ? Name of track A Genre The multifunction display shows station; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station; if this has been stored. X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. Currently set station; appears in themul- tifunction display.

X To open the station list: press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select a station in the station list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a station in the station list using rapid scroll: press and hold the: or9 button.

Menus and submenus 239

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X To select the frequency rangeor station memory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select the frequency range or station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i Store the station in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Further information on radio operation can be found in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and play- back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in the Media menu. X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To open/close the media sources list: pressa briefly. The list shows the followingmedia sources, for example:

RDisc (CD/DVD) RSD memory card RMedia Register RUSB storage device RBluetooth capable audio device

Please observe further information on media support and media operation on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audio media

: Media source, e.g. name of current CD ; Current title = Name of artist ? Name of album A Folder name Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equip- ment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To select an audio player or data car- rier: pressa briefly. The list containing the media sources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the corre- sponding audio player or media.

240 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X Pressa to confirm the selection. X To open the track list: press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous track in the track list: press the: or9 but- ton briefly.

X To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the button, the speed of rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.

If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio drive or audio media, the multifunction display may display the follow- ing: Rtrack number Rtrack name Rartist Ralbum The track information is not available in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To select a DVD single drive or DVD media: pressa briefly. The list containing the media sources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the corre- sponding DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm the selection. X To open the scene list: press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous scene in the scene list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a scene from the scene list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 until desired scene: is reached.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the man- ufacturers operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).

Menus and submenus 241

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Establish a Bluetooth connection to COMAND, see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

You will see one of the following display mes- sages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Telephonemenu, a displaymessage appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Telephone menu. X Press the6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call You can end or reject a call at any time even if you are not in the Telephone menu. X Press the~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button to switch to the phone book.

X Press: or9 to select the names one after the other.

or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the: or9 button for longer than one second. The names in the phone book are displayed quickly one after the other. If you press and hold the: or9 button for longer than five seconds, the name appears with the next or previous let- ter initial letter in the alphabet. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the6 ora button to start dialing.

or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the6 ora button to display the numbers.

X Press: or9 to select the number you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial- ing.

or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or% button.

242 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redial memory.

X Press the: or9 button to select the desired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial- ing.

or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or% button.

Assistance graphic menu

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Assistance Graphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. The assistance graphic shows you the sta- tus of and/or information from other driv- ing systems or driving safety systems:

RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187) RSpotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 247) RDistance warning and the autonomous braking function COLLISION PREVEN- TION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 70) RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 75) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 222) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 215) RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 225)

X Press: to display the ATTEN- TION ASSIST assessment.

Service menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Service menu: RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 251) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 369) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 330). RChecking the oil level using the on-board computer (Y page 327) (only Mercedes- AMG S 65 model)

Menus and submenus 243

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Settings menu: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 244) RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 246) RChanging the light settings (Y page 247) RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 248) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 249)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP (Y page 73).

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol- lowing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel

For further information about ESP, see (Y page 73). X Start the engine. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select ESP.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again.

ESP is deactivated if the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continu- ously when the engine is running. If the warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunc- tion. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 290). Observe the information on displaymessages (Y page 252).

Automatic activation of Night View Assist Plus X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select Night View Assist.

244 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.

If Night View Assist Plus automatic activation is switched on, the night vision image is auto- matically shown in themultifunction display if an object is detected. For further information about Night View Assist Plus (Y page 220).

Activating/deactivating Traffic Sign Assist The Traffic Sign Assist function allows you to choose whether traffic signs and mes- sages should be displayed in the lower area of the speedometer in certain conditions. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select Traffic Sign Assist.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again. If the function is activated, traffic signs and messages appear in the lower area of the speedometer.

For further information about Traffic Sign Assist, see (Y page 217).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the9 or: button to select Collision Prevention.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.

When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE Brake PRESAFE Brake is only available for vehi- cles with the Driving Assistance Plus pack- age. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again.

When PRE-SAFE Brake is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. For more information on PRESAFE Brake, see (Y page 75).

Menus and submenus 245

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select Blind Spot Assist.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea button again. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, white radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the Assis tance Graphic.

For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 222).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: or9 to select ATTENTION ASSIST.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: or9 to select Off, Stand ard or Sensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the Assistance Graphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 215).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs sist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press the: or9 button to select Lane Keeping Assist.

X Pressa to confirm. The current selection, Standard or Adap tive, appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again. For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 225).

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

: Vehicle speed display ; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display = Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign

Assist Using the Display Content function, you can, depending on your vehicle's equipment, choose between four standard displays. The

246 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

selected contents then appear in the head-up display. In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-specific contents. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select Display Content.

X Pressa to confirm. A graphic selection list appears.

X Press: or9 to select the desired display.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion.

Further information on navigation can be found on COMAND (see the separate operat- ing instructions). For further information about Traffic Sign Assist, see (Y page 217).

Setting the position You can adjust the position of the head-up display on the windshield. You can compen- sate for height differences if the seat posi- tions are changed, for example. X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 233).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the:or9button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Position function.

X Press thea button to save the setting. X Press: or9 to adjust the position to a level from Level +5 to Level -5.

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the set position of the head-up display as a single memory preset (Y page 120).

Setting the brightness The brightness of the head-up display is auto- matically adjusted to the surrounding ambi- ent light. You can also individually adjust the brightness of the head-up display. X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 233).

X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the:or9button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Head-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Brightness function.

X Press thea button to save the setting. X Press: or9 to adjust the bright- ness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

Light submenu

Switching the spotlight function on/off X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

Menus and submenus 247

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Lights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Spotlight function.

X Press thea button to save the setting. When the spotlight function is activated, the assistance graphic shows the pedes- trian symbol.

Further information on the spotlight function (Y page 221).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off This function is not available in Canada. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Lights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction dis- play are shown in white.

X Press thea button to save the setting. Further information on daytime running lamps Daytime Running Lights (Y page 124).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- tion allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the:or9button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instru ment Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- tion. The current setting km or Miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for dis- tance applies to: Rspeedometer Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu Radditional speedometer in the status area of the multifunction display. The unit in the additional speedometer is displayed inversely to the selected dis- tance unit. Rodometer and trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot RASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer on/off The Additional Speedometer [km/h] function allows you to choose whether the status area in themultifunction display shows the speed digitally. The unit in the additional speedometer is always inverse to the speed- ometer unit.

248 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Instru ment Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. X Press: or9 to select the Addi tional Speedometer [km/h] function. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.

Restoring the factory settings X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Factory Settings submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No or Yes.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

WARMUP

: Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Upshift indicator ? Transmission fluid temperature A Engine oil temperature X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP= indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine/transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at nor- mal operating temperature, oil tempera- ture? andA are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temper- ature? orA in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- put during this time.

Menus and submenus 249

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

SETUP

: Drive program C, S or M ; ESP mode (ON/OFF) = Suspension setting (SPORT/COMFORT) X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the:or9button on the steer- ing wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button until the SETUP display appears.

250 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages

Introduction

General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 192) RParking (Y page 170)

Hiding display messages X Pressa or% on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis- play messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes- sages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display. When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 251

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRESAFE, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ABS, ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFEBrake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), and ! warn- ing lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

252 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 253

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

254 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, theHOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Igni tion to Release the Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni- tion was switched off. X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 172). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 172).

Display messages 255

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: X Switch the ignition off. X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 172).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 384). X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

256 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec- onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 172).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the redF (USAonly) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 257

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake Inop erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec- onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- voltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

258 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. USA only: the red$ brake system warning lamp also lights up while the engine is running. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc- tioning. X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Collision Preven tion Assist Plus Currently Unavail able See Opera tor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera- tional. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven tion Assist Plus Inoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Inopera tive See Opera tor's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 259

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

PRE-SAFE Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Man ual

PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. PRESAFE PLUS and PRESAFE Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFE Functions Limited See Opera tor's Manual

PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is unavailable due to a mal- function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

260 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors Dirty See Opera tor's Manual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys- tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: RPRE-SAFE PLUS RPRE-SAFE Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. All driving systems and driving safety systems are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 335): Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper

X Restart the engine. The display message disappears.

Display messages 261

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).

6 Front Left Malfunc tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- ter.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Rear Left Malfunc tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- ter.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Cur tain Airbag Mal function Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur- tain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig- gered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

262 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Man ual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter- pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manualmust not appear in the multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys- tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul- tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas- sifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor- rectly.

Display messages 263

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 54).

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys- tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.

G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx- imately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag

264 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions Disabled See Operator's Manualmust not appear in the multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys- tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul- tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas- sifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor- rectly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 54).

Lights i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Left Corner ing Light or Check Right Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 265

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b License Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

266 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Backup Light

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Day time Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Active Headlamps Inoperative

The active light function is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Malfunction See Operators Manual

The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Switch Off Lights

You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to position.

Display messages 267

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Switch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. X Turn the light switch to position L or.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoper ative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur rently Unavailable See Operator's Man ual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Againmessage is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+ Check Coolant Level See Opera tor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 328).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 257 (125 ), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun- tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

268 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 257 (125 ). Other- wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 (124 ).

# See Operator's Man ual

The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 269

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manual display message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Start Engine See Operator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis- tance. The battery is being charged.

4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 325).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

270 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 325).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 325). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 327).

8 Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8 Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 271

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle Rising Please Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn- ing tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

Stop Vehicle Vehi cle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

272 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char- acteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC Malfunction Stop Vehicle

The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display mes- sage. The vehicle is leaking oil. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display mes- sage. Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC Vehicle Rising Please Wait Briefly

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn- ing tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

ABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 273

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Lane Keep ing Assist Cur rently Unavailable See Operator's Man ual

Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inop- erative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period. Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Clean the windshield.

Active Lane Keep ing Assist Inoper ative

Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Restart the engine.

Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

274 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Park Assist Can celed

The driver's door is open. X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter- vention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi- function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202).

Park Assist Inoper ative

PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbol is not shown in the multifunction display): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Switched Off

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically.

Night View Assist Currently Unavail able

Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthe outside temperature is too high. X Clean the windshield. X Clean the camera in the radiator trim. If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem- peratures, the systemwill switch back on automatically once it has cooled down. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis- play message disappears. Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Display messages 275

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Night View Assist Inoperative

Night View Assist Plus is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Spotlight Inopera tive

Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthe outside temperature is too high. X Clean the windshield. X Clean the camera in the radiator trim. If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem- peratures, the systemwill switch back on automatically once it has cooled down. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis- play message disappears. Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View Assist Plus is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis- play message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative

Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Off

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 192).

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 182). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

276 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo- rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 182).

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur rently Unavailable See Operator's Man ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta- tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist RPRE-SAFE Brake RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus pended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 182).

Display messages 277

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DTR+: Steering Assist. Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period. Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes- sage disappears. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: Steering Assist. Inopera tive

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inoperative

Cruise control is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control - - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 179).

278 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Please Correct Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 369). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 371).

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 342).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 369). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 279

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal function

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 342).

Tire Press. Moni tor Currently Unavailable

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen sor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon itor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni tor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

280 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the selector lever to position P or N.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to shift the selector lever to positionD, R orN without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine

With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the selector lever out of position P or N into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine.

Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehi cle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the selector lever is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary

The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the selector lever to position P.

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Display messages 281

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Reversing Not Pos sible Service Required

You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a mal- function. The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal function Stop

A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission com- ponents. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to position N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the selector lever to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, shift the selector lever to positionP before you switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.

282 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

_ Lock Seat Backrest Front Left or Lock Seat Backrest Front Right

The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Power Steering Mal function See Oper ator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 329).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey.

Take Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey.

Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 283

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Replace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 86).

Don't Forget Your Key

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. This display message is displayed in themultifunction display for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Not Detected (white display mes- sage)

The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

Key Not Detected (red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Locate the SmartKey. X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes- sage.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

Remove 'Start' But ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

284 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addi- tion, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 285

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Safety systems

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake systemwarning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan- ces.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake systemwarning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan- ces.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 287

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. Therefore BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVEN- TION ASSIST PLUS, ESP (Electronic Stability Program), PRESAFE, PRESAFE PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

288 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP, PRESAFE, PRESAFEPLUS, PRESAFEBrake, theHOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 289

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J !

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRESAFE, PRESAFEPLUS, PRESAFEBrake, theHOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

N The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP. In rare cases (Y page 74), it may be best to deactivate ESP. Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 73).

290 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRESAFE, PRESAFE PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunc- tion. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

N The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applications. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP. In rare cases (Y page 74), it may be best to deactivate ESP. Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 73).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 291

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F! NF (USA only) or! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unin- tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme- diately.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 44).

292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Engine

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights upwhile the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer- gency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work- shop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 293

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gage is at the start of the bar display. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective. The coolant temperature is no longer beingmonitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 328).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 257 (125 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 (124 ). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drivewhen your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluidswhich may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 295

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 328).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 257 (125), you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Further information on PRESAFE Brake (Y page 75). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 71).

296 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Tires

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMSmalfunction telltale for the TPMS is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 342).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 369). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMSmalfunction telltale for the TPMS flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 297

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Vehicle

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

298 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Useful information ............................ 300 Stowage areas ................................... 300 Features ............................................. 304

299

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- cle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occu- pants). The values are specified on the vehi- cle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- sible and as low down in the trunk as pos- sible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- ing or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situa- tions. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets.

300 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove box flap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards until it engages.

The glove box can be cooled (Y page 147). The glove box contains Ra coin holder Ra pen holder Rthree credit card holders Ra holder for the COMAND remote control

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90 clockwise to position 2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90 counter-clockwise to position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:. The eyeglasses compartment opens down- wards.

X To close: press marking: again and the eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartments in the center con- sole

X To open: briefly press marking;. X To close: push stowage compartment: in the direction of the arrow until it engages.

Stowage areas 301

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X Toopen: press button: or; and fold the armrest to the left or right.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USB port, an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio or video equipment, e.g. for an iPod, iPhone or MP3 player (see the sepa- rate COMAND operating instructions).

Stowage compartments in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled up fluo- rescent jacket and a small umbrella in stow- age compartment; in the doors. In doors: you can store bottles with a capa- city of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest

X To open: fold down the seat armrest. X Pull handle: and fold the armrests upwards.

Stowage compartment in the rear-com- partment center console

X To open: if required, fold up the rear seat armrest.

X Slide cover: in the direction of the arrow.

Stowage box in the rear seat backrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

302 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X To open: fold down the rear armrest. X Pull handle: and fold down cover;. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a DVD player is installed instead of a stowage com- partment.

Stowage nets Stowage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell Ron the back of the driver's and the front- passenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the trunk Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 300).

Securing loads using parcel net hooks

General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: RSecure the load using the parcel net hooks. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

There are four parcel net hooks in the trunk.

Stowage well under the trunk floor Under the trunk floor you can find a multi- purpose recess, e.g. for TIREFIT.

X To open: open the trunk lid. X Holding the ribbing, press handle: down- wards. Handle: folds upwards.

X Swing trunk floor; upwards using han- dle: until it rests against the trunk parti- tion.

Stowage areas 303

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X Fold out hook= on the underside of the trunk floor.

X Clip hook= into groove?. X To close: unclip hook= from groove?. X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the underside of the trunk floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- ing or abruptly changing directions.

RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situa- tions. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300).

! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center con- sole can otherwise be damaged by the con- centrated and reflected sunlight.

Cup holder in the front-compartment center console

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 301).

X Open the protective flap if necessary. X To remove: slide catch: forwards and pull the cup holder upwards.

304 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X To insert: make sure that the protective flap is closed.

X Insert the cup holder and slide catch: back.

You can remove the cup holder and the rub- ber mat for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder: or;. Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cup holder. The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container. The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; back until it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNING If themirror cover of the vanitymirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

: Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light: only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket; andmirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

Features 305

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X Fold down sun visor:. X Pull sun visor: out of retainer;. X Swing sun visor: to the side. X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could be trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again if someone becomes trapped. The opening or closing process is briefly stopped. The roller sunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged.

At temperatures below 4 (20) the roller sunblind cannot be operated.

Extending/retracting from the driver's seat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X To extend or retract: briefly press but- ton:. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

X To open: briefly press marking?. Stowage compartment= opens.

X To remove the insert: grip the sides of insert:, push it forward and pull it upwards;.

X To re-install the insert: press insert: into the drawer until it engages.

X To close: press stowage compartment= closed until it locks.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.

306 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions per- mit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart- ment

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X To open: briefly press marking=. Stowage compartment; opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:. Cigarette lighter: will pop out automati- cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press stowage compartment; closed until it locks.

12 V sockets

General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- ries include such items as chargers formobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the on- board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment center console

X To open: briefly press marking=. Stowage compartment; opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:. X To close: press stowage compartment; closed until it locks.

Socket in the rear compartment

Features 307

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 302).

X Open socket cover: or;. X To close: close the cover of the stowage compartment.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

Coolbox in the rear compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you cover the ventilation grille for the cool- box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Always make sure that the ventilation grille is not covered.

The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in the trunk. The coolbox can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg). If you want to store a bottle in the upper com- partment of the coolbox, the capacity of the bottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l). Store only plastic bottles in the upper com- partment of the coolbox.

Using the coolbox

X Vehicles with rear seat armrest: fold down the rear seat armrest.

X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

X To open: pull handle: on the cover. X Fold the cover out to the front. X To switch cooling level to low: press but- ton; once. An indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To switch cooling level to high: press button; twice. Both indicator lamps in the button light up.

X To switch off cooling: press button; repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends on the ambient temperature and the selected cooling level. The coolbox reduces its cooling output or switches off, if: Rmany electrical consumers are turned on Rthe starter battery is not sufficiently charged

308 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

This is indicated by the flashing indicator lamps in the button. The cooling function will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage.

Caring for the coolbox If you do not need to use the coolbox for an extended period you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time.

Removing and installing the coolbox

You can remove the coolbox for maintenance purposes. X To remove: switch off the coolbox. X Pull plug; down and out. X Unscrew both screws=. X Pull out the coolbox. X Close flap:. X To install: swing flap: to the side until it is locked in place by the magnets.

X Insert the coolbox. X Tighten both screws=. X Connect plug;.

mbrace

General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to acti- vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your

system is activated and operational. To log in, press the MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hot- lines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this pass- word to log onto thembrace area under "Own- ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe correspondingmobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Cus- tomer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel.

or X Use the COMAND volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Features 309

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detec- ted if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the MB Info call button does not light up during self-diag- nosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multi- function display after the system self-diag- nosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the systemmay not operate as expec- ted. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehi- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regula- tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 309). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated man- ually. As soon as the emergency call has been ini- tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display.

310 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- mined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been ini- tiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assis- tance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter attempts to getmore information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the systemhas been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con- tinuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashes until the emergency call is conclu- ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:. If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emer- gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi- ately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emer- gency call. In this case, always summon assis- tance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road- side Assistance button:. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button: flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Callmessage appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con nectedmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Features 311

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 315). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can findmore information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was estab- lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding COMAND button for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: press MB Info call but- ton:. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp inMB Info call button: flasheswhile the connection is beingmade. The Connecting Callmessage appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con nectedmessage appears in themultifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

312 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button

is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was estab- lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding COMAND button for ending a phone call.

Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer- gency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer- ing wheel Rthe corresponding button in COMAND to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is station- ary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor- tant destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1 the controller and confirm with7. The system calculates the route and sub- sequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book.

The destination download function is availa- ble if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is avail- able and data transfer is possible.

Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack- age and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the route assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a nav- igation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the cur- rent route section.

Features 313

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Search & Send

General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation sys- tem. Additionally, an mbrace service sub- scription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry ser- vice. A destination address which is found on Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination address X Go to the website http:// maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.

X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website.

Calling up a transmitted destination address X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151). The transmitted destination address is loa- ded into the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1 the controller and confirm with7. The system calculates the route and sub- sequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlock- ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is avail- able if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

314 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is availa- ble if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification number and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.

X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter contacts you and the local law enforce- ment agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified.

Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved sup- port for problemswith your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request for Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start vehicle diagnostics? message appears in the display.

Features 315

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X Press the Yes button to confirm the mes- sage.

X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X If the Please follow the instruc tions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. During this procedure, you will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Activemessage. If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice connection may be interrupted dur ing data transfer)message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the mes- sage. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer ring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep- resentative agreed with you, the voice con- nection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e- mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is due, the dis- play shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 28). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 24).

Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the navi- gation system, you will see the The external route has been saved to "Previous Destinations". Would you like to start navigation?message on the COMAND display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. If you select No the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start. Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again. You can find further information in the sepa- rate COMAND/Audio 20 operating instruc- tions.

Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi- cle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.

316 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- ded

Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun- daries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultane- ously. Different settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Own- ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representa- tive that you wish to activate geo fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehi- cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink garage door opener integra- ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-

ate up to three different door and gate sys- tems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following tele- phone assistance services: RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 26). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, per- sons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury.

Features 317

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Programing

Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 317).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu- ded with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to control the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons; to? on the inte- grated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in program- ming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow. Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon as button;,= or? is programming for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator

lamp: will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: point garage door remote controlA towards buttons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote control A until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- gramming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 318).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the correspond- ing button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote controlA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be neces- sary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 317). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The program- ming button may be positioned in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-

318 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

gramming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini- tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button;, = or? on the integrated garage door openermultiple times until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete.

Notes on programming the remote con- trol Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea- ture a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Release the button. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote controlA for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- gramming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programming process for the correspond- ing button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote controlA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be neces- sary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote controlA and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is com- patible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote controlA. This increases the like- lihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener.

Features 319

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the buttonwhich you are programming. Try var- ious angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote con- trol. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote controlA. RNote that some remote controls only trans- mit for a limited amount of time (the indi- cator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal recep- tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Press button;,= or? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- cator lamp: lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp: flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The trans- mission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if neces- sary.

Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Press and hold buttons; and?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.

X Release buttons; and?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the respective seat for- wards.

X To install: place the floormat in the foot- well.

320 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X Press studs: onto retainers; until you hear them engage.

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain- ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz range. In order to operate radio-controlled equip- ment, e.g. toll systems, areas: on the wind- shield are permeable to radio waves. You can install radio-controlled devices in these areas. These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield.

Features 321

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

322

Useful information ............................ 324 Engine compartment ........................ 324 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 330 Care .................................................... 331

323

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys- tem work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition sys- tem or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

324 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood. The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han- dle; up and lift the hood. Once you have lifted the hood about 15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically opened the rest of the way and held open by the gas-filled struts.

Closing the hood X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- stick (except Mercedes-AMG S 65 mod- els)

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

Engine compartment 325

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Example X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guide tube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:. X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark= and MAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

326 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer (Mercedes-AMG S 65 models) X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. X Use: or9 to select theEngine Oil Level submenu. X Pressa to confirm the selection. The Measuring Engine Oil Level Accurate Only When Vehicle Is Levelmessage appears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the multifunction display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Engine Oil Level OK The oil level is correct.

Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter)

The oil level is too low. X Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Reduce Engine Oil Level

The engine oil level is too high. X Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine Oil Level Ignition Must Be On

The ignition is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Need More Time to Check Engine Oil Level

The required waiting period was not observed. X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the measurement after about five minutes. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement after approximately 30 minutes.

Engine Oil Level Not Measurable with Engine Running

The engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible. X Switch off the engine. X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about five minutes before carrying out the measurement. If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.

Adding engine oil

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

Engine compartment 327

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a ser- vice system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuch engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

Example X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below theMINmark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- stick (Y page 325).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 403).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- ticularly when the engine is warm. When

328 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehi- cle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

or X Press Start/Stop button twice (Y page 151).

X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 (70 ).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 151) in the ignition lock.

or X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter- clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank;.

If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see (Y page 404).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab. X Place cap: on the edge of the filler neck and engage in place.

Engine compartment 329

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap: onto the filler neck until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec- ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompt- ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 283). Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 405).

ASSYST PLUS

Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 325).

The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. Days RService A Due RService A Exceeded by .. Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnec- ted.

Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before discon- necting the battery.

or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message X Press theaor%button on the steer- ing wheel.

Displaying service messages X Switch the ignition on. X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer- ing wheel to select the Service menu and pressa to confirm.

X Press the9or:button on the steer- ing wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS sub- menu and pressa to confirm. The service due date appears in the multi- function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this set- ting can be corrected at a qualified special- ist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth- erwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset

330 ASSYST PLUS M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements The specifiedmaintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- nance work must be carried out more fre- quently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri- ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter.

Driving abroad AnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsibleman- ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents rec- ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- cally in certain situations.

Care 331

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- tion in the following or other similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that: Rthe side windows are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0. Rthe 360 camera or rear view camera is switched off.

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec- tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the auto- matic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low

speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmis- sion will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral: Operating with the SmartKey: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if nec- essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

Operating with the Start/Stop button: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Engage park position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if nec- essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Key in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce

332 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- shield.

Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each coun- try. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec- tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inade- quate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

Care 333

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate con- ditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable sur- face damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.

334 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstan- ces prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the

graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (Y page 131).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lightswith awet sponge and amild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a dis- tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufac- turer.

Care 335

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X To open the cover of the rear view cam- era: with COMAND activated call up the vehicle menu: press the button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide the controller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select Rear View Camera: turn and press the controller.

X To select Open Camera Cover: turn and press the controller. The rear view camera cover opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens:.

Cleaning the 360 camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the 360 camera with a power washer.360

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X To open the cover of the 360 camera: with COMAND activated, call up the vehicle menu: press the button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide the controller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select the 360 Camera: turn and press the controller.

X To select Open Camera Cover: turn and press the controller. The cover of the 360 camera opens.

X To clean the 360 camera: clean camera lens: with clean water and a soft cloth.

If you drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0

336 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360 camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win- ter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household clean- ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer- cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- fiber cloth.

Cleaning Night and Day View Assist

Cleaning the camera behind the wind- shield ! Never clean the camera lens.When clean- ing the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work- shop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess:.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in front of camera;.

Care 337

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Cleaning the camera in the radiator trim

Camera lens: is cleaned at regular intervals by operating the windshield washer system. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens: when it is very dirty.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deploy- ment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- ces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ucts recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ucts recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes ! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen- uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the cov- ers is retained over time.

338 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- ers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. You can obtain these from a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.

Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 (80 ) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu- tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean- ing agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 339

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

340

Useful information ............................ 342 Where will I find...? ........................... 342 Flat tire .............................................. 342 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 347 Jump-starting .................................... 351 Towing and tow-starting .................. 354 Fuses .................................................. 356

341

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notes Apart from certain country-specific varia- tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. If the vehicle is equipped with tire-changing tools, these are located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Example : Tire sealant filler bottle ; Towing eye = Tire inflation compressor X Open the trunk lid. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 303). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 344).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: Rtires with run-flat characteristics (MOExtended tires) (Y page 343) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 342) Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you addi- tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist work- shop. Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 383). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

342 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 151).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the engine cannot be star- ted via your smartphone (Y page 154).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the bar- rier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)

General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tiremust not showany clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load- bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 377).

MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the displaymes- sages (Y page 279). Rcheck the tire for damage. Rif driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- tance possible depends upon: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving condi- tions/maneuver, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from themoment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction dis- play. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rthe type and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand- ard tire may be used as a temporary meas- ure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a

Flat tire 343

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem- peratures down to 4 (20 ).

G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres- sor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be oper- ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturers safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.

344 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom- panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla- tion compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 342).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA out of the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire seal- ant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down- wards into recess; of the tire inflation compressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faulty tire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC. X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket (Y page 307) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 151).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire infla- tion compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approx- imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation com- pressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 346). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 346).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Flat tire 345

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Tire pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

346 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release buttonE next to pres- sure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should there- fore have all work involving the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can

lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

i For further information about ABS and ESP, see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73).

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles:

G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhen charging the battery as well as when jump- starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build- up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth

Battery (vehicle) 347

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into con- tact with vehicle parts. RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat- tery. RIt is important that you observe the descri- bed order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis- connecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

All vehicles:

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special

collection point for used bat- teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop for more information.

! Always have work on the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12- volt battery yourself, please observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from roll- ing away. Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- tem may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- cle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The batteries and the covers of the positive terminal clamps must always be installed securely during operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro- tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat- tery. Avoid creating sparks.

348 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- guard. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehi- cle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- mum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further infor- mation. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

Charging the battery Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- mum charging voltage of 14.4 V.

All other vehicles:

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tures below freezing point. When jump-start- ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point.

Battery (vehicle) 349

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 351). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor bat- tery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 351).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes- Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- tion and availability. Read the battery charg- er's operating instructions before charging the battery. All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles: if the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low tem- peratures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may nei- ther jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out bat- tery may be shorter. The starting character- istics can be impaired, particularly at low tem- peratures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low tempera- tures, do not charge a battery which has been removed using a battery charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and the starting characteristics impaired, especially at low temperatures.

350 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven- tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles:

Jump-starting 351

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RKeep away from fire and open flames. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RAll vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RDo not lean over the battery. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 151). All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 151).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood.

Example: ground point cover X Turn fasteners: one turn and remove. X Remove the cover whilst pressing down on cap; of the washer fluid reservoir.

352 Jump-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Position numberD identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. X Slide coverC of positive terminal= in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal= on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryD using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal= on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryD to ground pointB of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryD first.

X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointB and negative terminalA, then from positive clamp= and positive terminal?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close coverC of positive clamp= after removing the jumper cables. X Replace the ground point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned precisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.

X Press fasteners: into the mountings until they engage. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 353

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthe brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- over.

There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the per- missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 399).

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto- matically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situa- tions: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission toN and do not open the driver's or front passeng- er's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to posi- tion P, which could damage the transmis- sion.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam- age, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in posi- tion N when the vehicle is being towed.

354 Towing and tow-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position N, have the vehicle transpor- ted on a transporter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N

i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 90). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under covers:. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray (Y page 342).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove cover: from the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Attach cover: to the bumper and press until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/ stowage tray.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 354). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic trans- mission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X You must use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 151).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi- tion 0.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion N.

X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 126). i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the com- bination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combina-

Towing and tow-starting 355

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

tion switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised.

! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP could other- wise damage the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towedwith the rear axle raised. The vehicle/trailer combination may oth- erwise swerve or even roll over.

Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loa- ded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the auto- matic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion N, you must provide power to the vehi- cle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 351). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could other- wise damage the automatic transmission.

i Information on "Jump-starting" (Y page 351).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by

356 Fuses Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 358). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe- cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or sys- tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- nents on the circuit and their functions stop operating.

Before changing a fuse X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).

X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 151).

or X When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart- Key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 151).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box on the driver's side of the dash- board RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel

Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- board. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X Open the driver's door. X To open: pull cover: outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of the dashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

Fuses 357

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

X Open the front-passenger door. X Fold cover: down and remove it.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X Open the hood. X To open: release retaining clamps: and remove cover;.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.

X Undo screws= on the fuse box. X Remove fuse box cover? forwards. X To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover?.

X Insert cover? at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer.

X Fold down cover? of the fuse box and tighten screws=.

Fuse box in the trunk ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

358 Fuses Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X Open the trunk lid. X To open: release cover: at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the direction of the arrow.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart.

Engine emergency off If the engine cannot be switched off as descri- bed, observe the following procedure: X Take the fuse allocation chart from the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 358).

X Search for Emergency engine shutdown in the fuse allocation chart.

X Remove the fuses listed under "Emergency engine shutdown".

Fuses 359

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

360

Useful information ............................ 362 Important safety notes ..................... 362 Operation ........................................... 362 Winter operation ............................... 364 Tire pressure ..................................... 365 Loading the vehicle .......................... 372 All about wheels and tires ............... 376 Changing a wheel .............................. 383 Wheel and tire combinations ........... 388

361

W he el s an d tir es

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel

G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warn- ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- shop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Information on the sizes and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 388). Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 372) Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 168) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 365)

Operation

Information on driving Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus- pect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or

362 Operation W he el s an d tir es

other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- age such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 363). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 365).

The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- ditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: in (3 mm) RM+S tires: in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of

Operation 363

W he el s an d tir es

Z

approximately in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- est, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an active tire pressure monitor and only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 343).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 383).

Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 (+7), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires perma- nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 (+7), use win- ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing thei snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-

364 Winter operation W he el s an d tir es

ditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- teristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 368). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 371).

Snow chains

G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 388). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-

ble when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg- ulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 197) or Active Body Control (ABC) (Y page 194), you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been installed. RWhen snow chains are installed, never use Active Parking Assist (Y page 202).

You may wish to deactivate ESP (Y page 74) when pulling awaywith snow chains installed. You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires includ- ing the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

Tire pressure 365

W he el s an d tir es

Z

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pres- sure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pres- sure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 372). The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recom- mended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.

366 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 377). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. Formore information, contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres- sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident.

Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gage to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressuremonitor, the tire pres- sure can be checked in the on-board com- puter. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend- ent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- sures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when check- ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the result- ing value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Tire pressure 367

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg- ular wear, which can severely impair the brak- ing properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the rec- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 365).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 365). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 168) Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pres- sure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto the valve.

368 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 365).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes If a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi- cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres- sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a fewminutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Servicemenu of the mul- tifunction display, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cally" section (Y page 370).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequencewill be repeated every time the vehi- cle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-

Tire pressure 369

W he el s an d tir es

Z

minated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incom- patible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 365). Note that the correct tire pres- sure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust- ing the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 371). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pres- sure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 365). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- ing pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is signif-

icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 279). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc- tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica- ted. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approx- imately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the on- board computer may differ from those meas- ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- ues indicated by a pressure gage are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressuremonitor can be affected by interference from radio trans- mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni- cally X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 151).

X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Press thea button.

370 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres sure .

X Press thea button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes- sages If the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction dis- play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check Tiresmessage appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction mes- sage appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 279). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota- ted, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is

rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the cor- rect positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressuremonitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the refer- ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- mended for the corresponding driving sit- uation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 365). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 365).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Press thea button. X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres sure .

X Press thea button. The current tire pressure for each wheel or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutesmessage

Tire pressure 371

W he el s an d tir es

Z

will be displayed in the multifunction dis- play.

X Press the: button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press thea button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction dis- play. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the% button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres- sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of

your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permis- sible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pres- sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maxi- mum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

372 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight: is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the speci- fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustra- tion are examples. The maximum permis- sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle- specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to

travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustra- tion are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load- ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com- bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicles Tire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo- grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capa- city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 373

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 372). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Example 1 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5 RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 2 - Rear: 3 RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) - Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) - Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) - Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) - Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg) Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3 RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 1 - Rear: 2

374 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

RWeight of the occupants - Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) - Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) - Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg) Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

Example 3 Step 1 RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2 RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2 RDistribution of the occupants:

- Front: 1 RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) RTotal weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg) Step 3 RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants): 1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 372). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissi- ble gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be car- ried by one axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- cle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

Loading the vehicle 375

W he el s an d tir es

Z

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their pur- pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia- ble information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors:: treadwear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applica- ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, ser- vice practices and differences in road char- acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfa- ces. You should pay special attention to road con- ditions when temperatures are around freez- ing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 363).Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than

376 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 364).

Temperature

G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is estab- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissi- pate heat when tested under controlled con- ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 381)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 380)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 380) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 368) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 381) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 377) D Load index (Y page 379) E Tire name The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designa- tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- city and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident.

All about wheels and tires 377

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- tion (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufac- turing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manu- facturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the man- ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam- eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is a numerical code that specifies the maxi- mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissi- ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 372). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on themaximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 380). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 379). Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- tions. Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

378 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Index Speed rating

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifica- tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam- ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maxi- mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specifi- cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam- ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

Index Speed rating

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have thei snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufac- turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been espe- cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac- tory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 388). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load index: may also be imprinted on the side- wall of the tire. You will find this after the let-

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 379

W he el s an d tir es

Z

ter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 377). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per- missible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissi- ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 372).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread- ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affec- ted tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi- cation code;, tire size=, tire type code? and manufacturing dateA. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol: marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manu- facturer identification code; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

380 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall: and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehi- cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufac- turer following specifications from the U.S.

government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recom- mended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identifica- tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug- gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica- ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

All about wheels and tires 381

W he el s an d tir es

Z

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occu- pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose- weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden- tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva- lent of 1 bar.

Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load indexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa- city more precisely.

Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- ment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi- tioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating The maximum load rating is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing themaximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-

382 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accesso- ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains themaximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 342) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 343).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- dent. Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the elec- tronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 384). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manu- facturer's warranty book in your vehicle docu- ments. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotate every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depending on the degree of tire wear. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac- tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary (Y page 371).

Changing a wheel 383

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed correspond- ing to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels Storewheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that "normal" level is selected for AIRMATIC (Y page 197).

X Switch off the engine. X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 151).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the engine cannot be star- ted via your smartphone (Y page 154).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 342). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards:. X Fold out lower plate;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate=.

X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

384 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack- ing up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor- rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi- cle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for per- forming maintenance work under the vehi- cle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake

and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen- gage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load- bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and hub caps: the hub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be installed.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastic hub caps:

Changing a wheel 385

W he el s an d tir es

Z

X To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap: is in the open position. To do this, turn the center cover counter-clock- wise.

X Position hub cap: and turn the center cover clockwise until hub cap: engages physically and audibly.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installed securely.

Vehicles with AMGwheels and aluminum hub caps: X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 342).

X Position socket; on hub cap:. X Position lug wrench= on socket;. X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap: and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is in the right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:. X Attach lug wrench= to socket; and tighten hub cap:. The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tight- ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends

that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

X Position jackA at jacking point?.

386 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrenchB until jackA sits completely on jacking point? and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrenchB until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should pro- ceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid apply- ing any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when brak- ing.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec- tion (Y page 383). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been

Changing a wheel 387

W he el s an d tir es

Z

approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should pro- ceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- wise pattern in the sequence indicated (: toA). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- ted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 365).

i Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys- tem: all mounted wheels must be equipped with functioning tire pressure control sen- sors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- cle.

388 Wheel and tire combinations W he el s an d tir es

These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes- ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen- sion variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in dam- age to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tes- ted and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- vious damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- ing tire tables: RBA: both axles RFA: front axle RRA: rear axle

The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 365). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte- nance recommendations of the tire manufac- turer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment always equip the vehicle with: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum- mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a dif- ferent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343).

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you addi- tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist work- shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can find infor- mation on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in cer- tain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The size of the approved

Wheel and tire combinations 389

W he el s an d tir es

Z

winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

390 Wheel and tire combinations W he el s an d tir es

Tires

S 550 4MATIC

Summer tires R 18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/50 R18 100 W4

RA: 245/50 R18 100 W4, 2

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y4, 2 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y4, 2 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)3

RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)3

4 Available as MOExtended tires. 2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 3 Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment (code 951).

Wheel and tire combinations 391

W he el s an d tir es

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL4, 2 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL4, 2 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL4, 2 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)3

RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)3

All-weather tires R 18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S4

RA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S4 FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y M+S3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

4 Available as MOExtended tires. 2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 3 Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment (code 951).

392 Wheel and tire combinations W he el s an d tir es

Winter tires R 18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si4

RA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si4

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.39 in (35.3 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si4

RA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si4

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) RA: 9 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.20 in (30.5 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)3

Mercedes-AMG S 63 4MATIC

Summer tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL5

RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL2, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL5

RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL2, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

4 Available as MOExtended tires. 3 Only for vehicles with AMG Line equipment (code 951). 5 Not in combination with a ceramic brake system. 2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 393

W he el s an d tir es

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+Si5 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+Si5 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 6

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 6

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

6 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". 2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 5 Not in combination with a ceramic brake system.

394 Wheel and tire combinations W he el s an d tir es

Mercedes-AMG S 65

Summer tires R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL6

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 6 FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tires R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 6

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si6

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 6

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm) RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

6 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations". 2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 395

W he el s an d tir es

Z

396

Useful information ............................ 398 Information regarding technical data .................................................... 398 Vehicle electronics ........................... 398 Identification plates ......................... 399 Service products and filling capaci- ties ..................................................... 400 Vehicle data ....................................... 406

397

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard andoptional equip- ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualified special- ist workshops (Y page 26).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron- ics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating com- ponents and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalida- ted.

! Engine management measures under- taken to increase performance can lead to increased wear and tear or damage to the drive system.

Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)

Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender ? Trunk lid

i On vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa- tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit- ting equipment). Observe the legal require- ments for retrofittings. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man- ufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi- mum transmission outputs or antenna posi- tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

398 Vehicle electronics Te ch ni ca ld at a

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values:

Waveband Maximum transmission

output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband 74 - 78 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle with- out restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis- sion output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequen- cies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile phones (3G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code

Identification plates 399

Te ch ni ca ld at a

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica- tion plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door. X Fold cover: down and remove it. You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following locations: Ron the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 400) Ron the vehicle identification plate (Y page 399)

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank- case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate,

including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci- ties

Important safety notes

G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant

400 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges- tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator'sManual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- tion on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indi- cate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l)

Model Of which reserve

MercedesAMG vehi- cles

Approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)

All other models Approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-

Service products and filling capacities 401

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

fied specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure.

! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- tives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. This does not include cleaning addi- tives for the removal and prevention of res- idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- ble and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- lowing precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the

label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- tance.

i For further information, consult a quali- fied specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

As a temporarymeasure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel- eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 168).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recom- mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommen- ded additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some coun- tries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso- line may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.

402 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to ful- fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service inter- val display regarding the oil change. Other- wise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor- tant safety notes on service products (Y page 400). The engine oils are matched to the perform- ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- tainers.

Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

Mercedes-AMG S 63 4MATIC

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

MercedesAMG S 65

11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low- temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out reg- ular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of

Service products and filling capacities 403

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (Y page 400). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist work- shop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in theMaintenance Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add anti- freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in theMaintenance Booklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 (-37), the boiling point of the cool- ant during operation is approximately 266 (130 ). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- tion in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 (-37 ). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 [-45 ]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord- ance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1 .

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- led with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main- tenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.

404 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

S 63 AMG 4MATIC 8.2 US qt (7.8 l)

S 65 AMG 11.3 US qt (10.7 l)

All other models 12.8 US qt (12.1 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter- Fit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.

! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other- wise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. Always have work on the climate control sys- tem carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable SAE standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant

Service products and filling capacities 405

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

Warning symbols: indicate: Rpossible dangers Rhaving service work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant

All models 23.3 0.4 oz (660 10 g)

Model PAG oil

Mercedes-AMG S 63 4MATIC

3.5 oz (100 g)

All other models 3.9 oz (110 g)

Vehicle data

General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload.

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

MercedesAMG vehicles

69.1 in (1755 mm)

All other models 68.7 in (1746 mm)

MercedesAMG vehicles

Vehicle length 198.6 in (5044mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

83.0 in (2108 mm)

Vehicle height 56.0 in (1422 mm)

Wheelbase 115.9 in (2945mm)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models

Vehicle length 197.9 in (5027mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

83.0 in (2108 mm)

Vehicle height 55.6 in (1411 mm)

Wheelbase 115.9 in (2945mm)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

406 Vehicle data Te ch ni ca ld at a

Model Turning radius

Mercedes-AMG S 63 4MATIC

39.0 ft (11.90 m)

All other models 38.1 ft (11.60 m)

Vehicle data 407

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Coupe Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz Coupe as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz Coupe. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz S-Class Coupe 2016 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.